JP7049668B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing an effect using a movable member in relation to a gaming machine.

A gaming machine including a movable member having a light emitting element and an effect control means for controlling an effect using the movable member is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-144136

However, it cannot be said that the production using the movable member, which is executed by the conventional gaming machine, is very interesting.
An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of a production using a movable member.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine capable of performing an effect using a movable member in connection with a gaming machine.
Equipped with a display device
The movable member is
Predetermined operations including movement from the first position to the second position and movement from the second position to the first position can be performed, and light can be emitted.
The emission color of the movable member and the display color of the display device during the period when the movable member moves from the second position to the first position are colors of the same system.
Make a slight movement before performing the predetermined operation ,
The predetermined operation can be executed at the first timing in the running game and the second timing which is the timing in the game and is the timing after the first timing.
It is characterized in that the probability of executing the predetermined operation differs between the first timing and the second timing in the game when an advantageous state favorable to the player occurs .

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the movable member.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special gaming state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display device. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common process of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead jackpot determination process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1 and the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main process of an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variation effect setting process. It is a figure explaining the case where there are a plurality of types of small hits. It is a figure explaining the small hit design. It is a figure explaining the small hit symbol replacement production. It is a figure explaining the small hit symbol replacement effect. It is a figure explaining the small hit symbol replacement effect. It is a figure explaining the small hit symbol replacement effect. It is a figure explaining the small hit symbol replacement production. It is a figure explaining the small hit symbol replacement effect. It is a figure explaining the small hit symbol replacement effect. It is a figure explaining the small hit symbol replacement effect. It is a figure explaining the small hit symbol replacement effect. It is a figure explaining the character production. It is a figure explaining the character production. It is a figure explaining the character production. It is a figure explaining the character production. It is a figure explaining the character production. It is a figure explaining the character production. It is a figure explaining the character production. It is a figure explaining the light emission effect. It is a figure explaining the specific effect using the effect means.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed as an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game ball paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub-display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player rotates the operation unit 24, so that the hitting ball launching device launches the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. do. Further, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. The game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a hitting ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube), for example. Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

The center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating the center case 40. The board effect device 44 can be operated downward from the state shown in FIG.
A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). The game ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (not shown), and the movable member always holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the game ball is easily flowed into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device (game). It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person.

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes by advancing and retreating (sliding) in the front-rear direction by the normal variable winning device 37c. The movable member of 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side by the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, or the ordinary electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of an inverted "C".
Further, the normal variable winning device 37 enables the winning of the game ball even when the movable member is closed, and the game ball may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, the game ball is not accepted or easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper large winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving back and forth (sliding) the opening / closing member (not shown). The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), a specific area where the game ball can flow in is provided, and the lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 3) is provided so as to change the inflow probability of the game ball into the specific area. ) Is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous for the player is obtained. It occurs (in this embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper prize opening, a residual ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area is provided. ing. The number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided inside the upper winning opening (the number of gaming balls flowing into the upper winning opening), and detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball ejection port switch 38e. By matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls ejected from the upper prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize opening have been discharged, and basically until this confirmation is completed. Is not open to the new top prize openings.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a second special variable winning can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower prize opening) 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower large winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving back and forth (sliding) the opening / closing member (not shown). The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

The game area 32 below the starting winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning opening or the like.
Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal map variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 variable display for a special figure 1 variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A special figure 2 display unit (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 52 for games, a first storage display unit 53 for notifying the start storage number of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and an LED lamp. A second storage display unit 54 for notifying the start storage number of the configured special figure 2 variable display game is provided.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying a hitting method (a hitting method corresponding to a game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of a special figure variation display game are provided. There is. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when a jackpot occurs to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, the normal map display unit 58 that displays the normal map fluctuation display game, the storage display unit 59 for notifying the start storage number of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the time saving state that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven. It is configured so that it is displayed that it is changing and it is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode of the hit result mode (special result mode) is turned on and the game result is displayed.

The first storage display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. , Displayed by lighting (blinking).
The second storage display unit 54 sets the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, of the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by turning off and on (blinking).
The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when not in the special game state, all the LEDs are turned off, and during the special game state, the LEDs are turned on according to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 is composed of LED lamps and the like. For example, in the case of a game state in which left-handed hitting is more advantageous to the player than right-handed hitting (normal hitting), all the LEDs are turned off and left. When right-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (when right-handed), all LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the probability state of a big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probability change state). In the case of, all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply unit having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. It has a 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. A control signal generation unit 430 or the like that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal is provided.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in reach and non-reach fluctuation display), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37. The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and the gate switch in the general drawing start gate 34. 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e arranged in the first special variable winning device 38, and an out ball detection switch 32a that detects all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that is connected to and inputs a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. Is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. Will be done. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on a front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, a detection signal of a vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10, and a game machine. The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of 10 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become.

Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole for inserting the setting key, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it goes off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values that give special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and operate these operation units. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. There is. Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values.

When selecting the probability setting value, turn on the power of the gaming machine while operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. The probability setting value change mode is set, and the probability setting value can be changed by operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability setting value change mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the probability set value information while the operation related to the probability set value is being performed (during the probability set value change mode and the probability set value confirmation mode), and other than that. In, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed.

Further, by turning on the power of the gaming machine with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability setting value is the performance display device. It is displayed in 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed. The probability setting value confirmation mode is set. The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is in the open state.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise is removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124, 126 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61, the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a second large winning opening solenoid (large) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. The operation data of the winning port solenoid 2) 39b, the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38, and the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37 are output and are currently selected. It is a port for outputting the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the probability set value.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the peripheral solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. It is output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135. The external information signal supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw side of the batch display device 50 to the external device such as the management device is sent to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d for output and a fifth driver 138e for generating and outputting a drive signal by receiving the display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 are provided. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. DC5V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the fifth driver 138e so that the performance display device 153 operating at 5V can be driven.
Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. not.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate. The switch 34a is provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil is used. Has been done. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

FIG. 5 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

The value (probability value) of the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state are respectively. The probability value is as shown in FIG. 5 (a).
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned as the probability value in the high probability state to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6", but different probabilities. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2" as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. It may be assigned. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6". That is, the probability value in the low probability state is not limited as long as it can be switched to multiple stages. Further, the same probability value may be assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be switchable in multiple stages.

Further, the effect distribution and the like may be different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" having the same probability value in the assigned low probability state. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6".
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, there are six probability setting values (“setting 1”) for three types of probability values (probability value in the low probability state and probability value in the high probability state). "-" Setting 6 ") is assigned, but for example, three probability setting values (for example," setting 1 "to" setting 3 ") are assigned to three types of probability values, and the remaining three probability setting values (for example) are assigned. "Setting 4" to "Setting 6") may be omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the special gaming state based on the big hit (first special gaming state), the gaming ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operating region) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific region switch 38d. By being played (passing V), the high probability state is set after the end of the special gaming state, and the low probability state is set when the fall lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed is won. The probability of winning the fall lottery is as shown in FIG. 5 (b).
Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 5 (c). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not won in duplicate. In this embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but is provided only in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but the small hit is not limited to this, and for example, the small hit. May be provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, when the small hit is provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 is better than the special figure 1. May be higher, and special figure 1 may be higher than special figure 2.

Further, FIG. 5D shows the jackpot types that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
There are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game: 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. Similarly, there are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The numbers of each jackpot type indicate the actual number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and is likely to become a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. It is shown that the possibility that the game ball flows into a specific area (probability change operation area) is low and it is difficult to reach a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds for which opening control is performed so that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the number of actual rounds + the number of rounds in which the opening time of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is short and the opening control is performed so that the winning ball does not actually occur). May be.

Further, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is lower than that of the probabilistic jackpot, but the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is higher than that of the normal jackpot.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state depending on whether or not the gaming ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operation region). If the game ball does not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

6 (a) to 6 (c) show the opening mode in each round in each jackpot type. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 6A, in the 10R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific region (probability variation operation region) is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed. Long opening with V is an opening mode in which a game ball is likely to flow into a specific region (probability variable operating region). Then, after the second round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and a long opening without V is performed.
As shown in FIG. 6B, in the 4R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific region (probability variation operation region) is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed. Then, from the 2nd round to the 4th round, the 1st special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened. The long opening without V is performed, and after the 5th round, the 1st special variable winning device 38 is opened. The specific area is not opened. Short opening without V is performed. The V-less short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the large winning opening is lower than the V-less long opening. That is, the long opening without V is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning ball is actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 6 (c), in the 10R normal jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the specific region (probability variable operating region) is opened in the first round, and a short opening with V is performed. Short opening with V is an opening mode in which there is a possibility that a game ball may flow into a specific region (probability variable operating region), which is lower than long opening with V. Then, from the second round onward, a long opening without V is performed to open the first special variable winning device 38.
The game ball can flow into the specific area (probability change operation area) only in the long opening with V and the short opening with V performed in the first round. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which the gaming ball may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the specific round may be performed a plurality of times, such as the first round and the fifth round.

As shown in FIG. 7A, in the long opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25,000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). When any of the conditions for winning the game ball of) is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended (t12). After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t12), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t13), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t14). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 7B, in the long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers a specific area and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and the game ball can flow in. It becomes. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, the game ball that has won a prize immediately after the first special variable prize device 38 is opened may flow into a specific area.

When 200 msec has passed from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, when 2700 msec elapses, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t35), either the openable time of 25000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins. When the condition is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t39), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t41), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t42). .. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the specific area switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is a sufficiently long opening, and the lever solenoid 38f remains ON for a long time, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into a specific area. Become. Therefore, when the jackpot type is probabilistic, it will almost certainly be in a high probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 just before closing. It is possible for the game ball to flow into a specific area. The first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls being won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed by the remaining ball of the upper prize opening. If all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41), and the specific area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period (t43) when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and operates when the discharge is completed. Is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If not all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) The lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated. In this case, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

As shown in FIG. 7 (c), in the short opening with V, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the long opening with V is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. The round ends based on (t54). Since the opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time, the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific region is low. Therefore, it is rare that a high probability state occurs when the jackpot type is normal.

The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching between valid and invalid of the specific area switch 38d are performed in the same manner as in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38. t55 to t63). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time of the remaining ball in the upper prize opening has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. The operation is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not ejected by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62). The specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62) after the operation is terminated in the state.

Further, the first opening (t31 to t34) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the long opening with V shown in FIG. 7 (b) and the first special variation in the short opening with V shown in FIG. 7 (c). The opening of the winning device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to such an opening time that at least one game ball can be won by the first special variable winning device 38.

As shown in FIG. 7 (d), in the short open without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (t71) with the start of the round, and the openable time of 200 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). ), The first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended when any of the conditions for winning the game ball is satisfied (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of prizes, which are the conditions for closing, occur, and in most cases, the game is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t72), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t73), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, FIG. 6D shows an opening mode in the second special gaming state (special gaming state based on small hits). In the second special gaming state, first, the small hit fanfare time is started, and when the small hit fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, and the openable time of 1600 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example). The second special variable winning device 39 is closed when any of the conditions for winning the 9) game balls is satisfied. After that, the small hit remaining ball processing time is started, when the small hit remaining ball processing time ends, the small hit ending time starts, and when the small hit ending time ends, the second special gaming state ends. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of opening modes (opening time and number of opening times) in the second special gaming state, and in that case, for example, it is determined which opening mode is set (adopted) based on the small hit symbol. ..

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a game state transition in the present embodiment.
The gaming state includes a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, and a second specific gaming state ST3. In addition to this, as the special gaming state, there are a first special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the main in the game state. The main starting area, which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main variable special map, which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a left-handed hit can be aimed at winning a prize in the starting winning opening 36, and a right-handed hit can be aimed at winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Further, in each game state, the game is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly advanced, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to play the game mainly in the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so that the game progresses. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, the special figure probability is a low probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and there is no special figure fluctuation display game or normal. Figure Fluctuation display There is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state ST1. ..

In the second specific gaming state ST3, the special figure probability is basically a low probability state. However, in the special game state based on the normal jackpot, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 (when the V is passed), the probability state is high. In addition, there is a general electric support that facilitates winning by improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable winning device 37. If there is a normal power support, there is also a time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special map is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure changing display game. There is a certain amount of time to shorten the fluctuation time of. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the small hit RUSH. Further, the main variable special map is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In this embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal map fluctuation display game with the normal electric support (normal probability) is the same as the probability without the normal electric support (normal probability). In a state where there is a normal power support, the normal probability can be set to a higher probability (high probability state of the normal figure) than the normal probability (low probability state of the normal figure).
Further, in the present embodiment, the state without the normal variable winning device 37 means that the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 is shorter than the state with the normal variable winning device 37. be.

In the first specific gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal gaming state ST1, and the normal variation winning device 37 is hit right. It is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at. The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variable display game (in the case of this embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0), and the small hit is won rather than the big hit. Since there is a high probability of this, small hits occur frequently in the first specific gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3.
If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state in which the normal electric support is provided continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, the state without the normal electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit. Further, in the special gaming state based on the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 6D).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable prizes. It wins a prize in the device 37 and does not flow down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the second specific gaming state ST3, small hits occur frequently, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable prizes. Instead of winning a prize in the device 37, the game flows down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the player's game ball by a small hit. That is, in the first specific gaming state ST2, small hits occur frequently and the number of balls held by the player increases. Therefore, the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

Of these three gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific gaming state ST3 is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state ST1 because it has a general electric support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high-probability state, and further, since the player's ball possession increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, the player has a higher probability than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3. It is in an advantageous state.

The transition of the gaming state is performed by ending the first special gaming state based on the derivation of the first special result, exhausting the specified number of games, and winning the fall lottery which is the transition lottery to the low probability state. .. Basically, the probability variation jackpot is derived and becomes the first special gaming state, and in the first special gaming state, the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 and the specific area switch. When it is detected in 38d (when there is V passage), it shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 after the end of the first special gaming state. On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot is derived and the first special gaming state is reached, and the game ball does not flow into the specific region (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the first special gaming state (no V passage). In the case of), the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 after the end of the first special gaming state. In addition, if a normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special gaming state, and there is no V passage in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure low probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. It shifts to the second specific game state ST3). On the other hand, if a normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special gaming state, and there is a V passage in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure high probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. It shifts to the second specific game state ST3).
Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (support count) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, when the fall lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a hitting ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or the game area flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32. It is discharged from 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the gaming ball into the left gaming area (so-called left-handed) to move the starting winning opening 36 or the starting winning opening 36 to the left. It is possible to aim for a prize in the arranged general prize opening 35, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device, and the normal variable winning device 37 It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), the number of normal figure start storages is added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored in ROM 111B. The stored number of the normal map start prize is displayed on the normal map hold display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory for starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is judged. Then, the process of starting the normal map fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time in the normal map display unit 58 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process for executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the ordered order, the process of displaying the normal map fluctuation display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the normal figure display unit 58 is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the figures in a predetermined time variation, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. It may be configured.

When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern, which is a special result mode, is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display unit 58, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to display the movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map display unit 58 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the out of alignment.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition to storing, the second start memory, which forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the big hit random value, the big hit symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. Then, the stored number of the start storage is the first storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) and the second storage display unit 54 (special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50. It is also displayed as a decorative special drawing start memory display on the display device 41 of the center case 40.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 display 52 (1st variation display device) based on the second start memory. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game is played on the second fluctuation display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In that case, one of the special figure fluctuation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, if the other special figure variation display game has a second special result (small hit) during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the one is concerned until the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit. The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area). It serves as a first execution control means for controlling. Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning area). It serves as a second execution control means for performing execution control.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). It becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, after the end of the big hit game state (first special game state), the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and the probability of hitting is high). It is possible to control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can proceed by (with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure variation in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the display device 41. The display game is now running. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special map variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 variablely displays the decorative identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (decorative variable display game). It is a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is 0), but it is special in the normal gaming state. FIG. 2 Fluctuation display A long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left to aim at the start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game.
The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Further, the time of the long fluctuation may be different depending on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is off or a small hit, a long variation with a variation time of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, a long variation with a variation time of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is the start address of an area for saving the value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. The stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is supplied. Wait for it to be blocked.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is any. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when a power failure has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). When the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step). X11), output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X13), and the gaming microcomputer is set. A process (step X14) for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM. It is determined whether the value of the region 2 is the normal power failure inspection region check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), the checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), the RAM error flag is cleared (step X20) because there is no abnormality in the RAM, and the process proceeds to step X21.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), the step. It is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state based on the state read by X6 (step X21). Then, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is issued to the effect control board (effect control). It is transmitted to the device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the command for notifying the main abnormality error is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, if the power of the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed, the operation of the gaming control device 100 is stopped, so the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIG. 13 (h). After that, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

Further, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM error flag is set (step X27). Then, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and the speakers 19a and 19b. Notifies that the probability setting value is being changed by outputting voice from the user.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23). In N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, when the setting key switch 152 is not in the ON state (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N), that is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step X41 and the power failure occurs. Performs processing when it is restored normally.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step X43; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

When the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), the probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X37). Based on receiving the command during the probability setting confirmation, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and the speakers 19a and 19b. Notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed by outputting the voice by.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or longer, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process in the probability setting value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information editing of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, when the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. To. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, since it is necessary to output a security signal for at least 50 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on), but in the state read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) (current state). Judgment based on. When it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
When the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and when a power failure has not occurred (step X34; N), step X33 is performed. Return, and if a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting changing flag is set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 9 and 10) after the power failure is restored. It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for disabling interrupts (step X38) is performed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec) between the process of enabling interrupts (step X32) and the process of disabling interrupts (steps X38 and X55). .. In the timer interrupt process, the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability set value, is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). Based on receiving the command to end the notification, the effect control device 300 ends the execution notification (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed). ..

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Performs a power failure recovery process (step X41) that saves an initial value at the time of power failure recovery in an area to be initialized (for example, a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring). The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in this step X41.
After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold count commands, special figure 2 hold count commands, probability information commands, effect count information commands, screen designation commands, and the like. Send the command. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress, the command is waiting for a customer. Send the command of the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability set value (work area (1 byte area of the probability set value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, clear the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in this step X44. In step X44, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, and a RAM initialization command (customer waiting). Along with displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command, a support count information command, etc., which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with normal electric support, are also transmitted.

Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (win random number), random number that determines whether or not to win the fall lottery (fall lottery random number)) After saving in the predetermined area of (step X48), the interrupt is permitted (step X49). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the winning random number, and the fall lottery random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are processed by the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the winning random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.
In this embodiment, since a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the normal figure is not provided, there is only one type of hit symbol of the normal figure, but a hit symbol random number is provided and the hit symbol of the normal figure is provided. May be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process in step X50, a process for prohibiting interrupts (step X51) is performed, and a performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process is performed. Return to (step X50). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X50) (step X49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step X50, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and if such a method is adopted, the initial value in both of them. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. There is an advantage that it is converted.

On the other hand, when a power failure occurs (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.
Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. The initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y). , Probability setting change / confirmation processing (step X122) is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are based on the output data set in various processes. , Lever solenoid 38f, Fuden solenoid 37c) and other actuators are subjected to output processing (step X105) for driving control and the like. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated within the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step X106), the random number update process 1 (step X107), and the random number update process 2 (step X108) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, setting the prize ball, the front frame and the glass. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109) for opening the frame and monitoring errors such as illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable prize device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) in the first special variable prize device 38 is The number of game balls that have flowed into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 38a) is exceeded. If an abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. Then, if an abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the start port switch monitoring process (step X111) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37. Then, the special figure 1 game process (step X112) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 game process (step X113) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game, and the normal figure variable display game processing are performed. Performs the normal map game process (step X114), and drives the segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 to display the display of the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display the desired content. The editing process (step X115) is performed.

Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X116) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and a process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. Radio fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) that checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 and determines whether there is an abnormality, and determines whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Perform the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119). Further, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display monitor 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is completed. do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In this probability setting change / confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (range 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X131).
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y), the probability setting corresponding to the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM (current probability setting value). The value display data is set (step X132), and the probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (f).
On the other hand, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131; N), the extinguishing data is set as the probability setting value display data (step X133), and the probability setting value is displayed. The data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIG. 13 (g).

As shown in FIG. 13, the performance display device 153 is composed of four 7-segment displays (7-segment type display) arranged side by side. In the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the current probability setting value is shown on the rightmost 7-segment display among these four 7-segment displays, and the remaining 7-segment display shows "SET". It is designed to indicate the character.
Specifically, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the current probability setting value is "setting 1", so 7 at the right end as shown in FIG. 13 (a). When "1" is displayed on the seg display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "1", the current probability setting value is "setting 2", so that is shown in FIG. 13 (b). As shown, "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display at the right end, and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "2", the current probability setting value is "setting 3". As shown in FIG. 13 (c), when "3" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "3", the current probability setting value is "set". Since it is "4", "4" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13 (d), and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "4", it is the current value. Since the probability setting value is "setting 5", "5" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13 (e), and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "5". In the case of, since the current probability setting value is “setting 6”, “6” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13 (f). Further, when the value in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the 7-segment display at the right end is turned off as shown in FIG. 13 (g).
For example, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the probability setting value display data is "1" in the first digit, "T" in the second digit, and the third digit. The probability setting value display data instructing to display "E" and "S" in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step X135). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Next, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X136). In step X136, on-data of the security signal is output regardless of whether or not the security signal control timer is timed up. Therefore, the security signal will continue to be output during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirmation flag is set).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Ends the probability setting change / confirmation process. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process during execution is the probability setting change / in the first timer interrupt process after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139). In step X139, when an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected in the immediately preceding input process (step X103), it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y), that is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is set to 0 to 0. Update by +1 in the range of 5 (step X140), and end the probability setting change / confirmation process. The value updated in step X140 (probability setting value after update) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change / confirmation process.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” are applied to three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). However, for example, "setting 1" to "setting 3" may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the area for the probability setting value of RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the mode can be shifted to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated during the probability setting value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with.
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only perform a pressing operation, it is not possible to distinguish between a transition operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode) continues even during the probability setting value change mode, that is, the RAM initialization switch is performed from the time the power is turned on. If 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

Specifically, in the input process of the timer interrupt process (step X103), the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is in the off state, and the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is in the off state. When the state is on, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on, the input process immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input process, and the input process immediately after the power is turned on is the current input process. There is a high possibility that the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the process is an off state. That is, if the transition operation continues even during the probability setting value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected. Therefore, in this case, if the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transition operation. There may be a problem that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, the process of step X138 is performed, and the process of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. I will do it. As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability setting value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has continued since the power was turned on (that is, the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode). Since the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation) is ignored, it is possible to prevent an unintended update.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result. A storage means for storing one of a plurality of probability setting values to which the operation unit (setting key operation unit) and the second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) and the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM111C)) and a mode for shifting to a probability setting value change mode in which the probability set value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the power of the game machine is turned on. In response to the operation of the transition means (game control device 100) and the second operation unit in the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value stored in the storage means (value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM). ) Is provided with a setting changing means (game control device 100), an operation of the second operation unit for shifting to the probability setting value changing mode (shifting operation), and a second for changing the probability setting value. The operation (change operation) of the operation unit is the same operation (pressing operation in the case of this embodiment), and the setting changing means continues from the time when the power of the game machine is turned on even in the probability setting value changing mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the second operation unit.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on continues even after the transition to the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time, which is not intended. It is possible to prevent the change of the probability set value.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
FIG. 14 shows the start port switch monitoring process (step X111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In this start port switch monitoring process, first, a start port 1 (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process (step X492) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is information with a start opening prize set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (normal gaming state). (Step X494). Then, in the case of low probability of special figure & no time reduction (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. Further, when the special figure has a low probability and the time is not shortened (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process (step X496) is performed.

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform right-handed by display, voice, or the like. When in a specific gaming state or a special gaming state, right-handed is more advantageous for the player, and the starting winning opening 36, which is designed so that a prize is not won unless the player is left-handed, is in the specific gaming state or the special gaming state. When a prize is detected inside, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Then, a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure start port switch common process (step X498) is performed. Next, a starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table was prepared (step X499), a hard random number acquisition process (step X500) was performed, and a big hit random number was acquired based on the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning that is set in the case (step X501).

If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the start opening winning is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), is the Fuden (normal variable winning device 37) operating, that is, normal? It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is in the open state in which the game ball can be won by operating (step X502), and if the normal power is operating (step X502; Y), the process proceeds to step X504. Transition. On the other hand, when the normal electric power is not operating (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the normal electric power is being generated (step X503).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If an illegal operation is occurring (step X503; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more. Further, when the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X504), and the special figure start port switch common process (step X505) is performed. Then, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
FIG. 15 shows a special figure start port switch common process (steps X498, X505) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a.

In this special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is sent to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step X523).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure hold (start) corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is held. It is determined whether the number of storage), that is, the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) to be updated is less than the upper limit value (here, 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because it loops due to +1 update and becomes 0.

Then, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step X525; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step X527). Next, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared by the hard random number acquisition process is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM. (Step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Next, the fall lottery random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and saved in the fall lottery random number storage area of the RWM (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is in the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) (step X534), and if the winning is not in the starting port 2 (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X534; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). ..

Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step X538), which is a look-ahead process, is performed. Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step X539), the effect command setting process (step X540) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit as the first starting memory. It serves as a starting memory means. Further, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and the predetermined random number can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit as the second starting memory. 2 Makes a start storage means.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
16 and 17 show the special figure hold information determination process (step X538) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (during the first special gaming state) (step X541), and if the jackpot is in progress (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination is made. End the process. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not hit (step X541; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special drawing start opening switch common process is checked, and the starting opening 1 (starting opening winning opening 36) is won. (Step X542).

In the case of winning a prize in the starting port 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 to perform look-ahead. On the other hand, when it is not a prize to the starting port 1 (step X542; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal gaming state) (step X543). Then, when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (step X543; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, in the normal gaming state, long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, look-ahead is not performed. On the other hand, when it is not in the special figure low probability & no time reduction (step X543; N), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step X544).

If the special figure is not in high probability (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, when the special figure high probability is in progress (step X544; Y), is the value of the fall lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the special figure start port switch common process within the range of the judgment value of the fall winning? Determination (step X545). Next, a look-ahead fall lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), an effect command setting process (step X547) is performed, and a low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit low probability determination value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X551), and the preparation is made in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X552), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). (Step X553).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X553; Y), the small hit determination process (step X554) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. When the determination result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X557), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X555; N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X558), and the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557 or the stop symbol information is set in step X558. The stopped symbol information that has been stopped is saved in the symbol information area (step X559).

After that, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X560), and the effect command setting process (step X561) is performed.
Next, a pre-reading jackpot determination process (step X563) in which a high probability determination flag is prepared (step X562) and whether or not the jackpot random value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit high probability determination value) is determined to be a jackpot. I do. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X565), and in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X564; N), the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). (Step X567).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X567; Y), the small hit determination process (step X568) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. When the determination result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X571), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X569; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step X573).

Then, when the special figure is not in high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability (step X573; Y), the stop symbol information acquired in step X566 or X571 or the stop symbol information in step X572 is set in the symbol information area in which the stop symbol information is saved in step X559. The stop symbol information set in the above is overwritten and saved (step X574). The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for pre-reading of fluctuation patterns and the like.

Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X575), and the effect command setting process (step X576) is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result of determination by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result of determination by the jackpot high probability determination value are transmitted to the effect control device 300. Will be done.
Next, the special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step X578) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. I do.
Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and the effect command setting process (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure hold information. End the process. The special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special map normal processing.

By the above processing, the look-ahead fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead stop including the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target. A pre-reading variation pattern command including information on the symbol command and the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, whether or not the result-related information corresponding to the start memory (whether or not the jackpot probability state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state (normal probability state)), and whether or not the jackpot or small hit is performed. , The determination result (look-ahead result) of the variation pattern) can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, and is particularly displayed on the display device 41. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decoration special figure start memory display to be performed.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means capable of determining the result of the variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variation display game based on the start storage stored in the start storage means. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). Make a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
FIG. 18 shows the look-ahead jackpot determination process (steps X549, X563) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process. In this look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step X581), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed.
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (step X583). When the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, when the determination flag is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; N), that is, when the jackpot is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step X588), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 19 shows the special figure 1 game processing (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 1 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In this special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). In the special figure 1 variable display game, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) and the second special gaming state is executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game. , Is interrupted during the execution of the second special gaming state.

If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 variation display is performed. Perform processing related to the game. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game in steps Y101 to Y115 is performed. Instead, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In the process related to the special figure 1 variable display game, first, the special gaming state executed based on whether the special figure 2 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is the big hit or the small hit. It is determined whether it is inside (step Y101). Then, in the case of a big hit / small hit in FIG. 2 (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y104. On the other hand, when the big hit / small hit of FIG. 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y103) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be sent to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Process. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Regarding the special game state executed based on the fact that is a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the specific area is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. Based on the fact that this specific area passage flag is set, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y104), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105). Then, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y105; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y116. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y106). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired (step Y107), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game process number is performed (step Y108).

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the change start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game are monitored. FIG. 1 Special figure 1 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 1 Performs normal processing (step Y109).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1 are performed. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y110).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or each big hit type. The special figure 1 display processing (step Y111) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special drawing 1 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y115) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing (step Y109). I do.

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y116), the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y117) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed, and the lever solenoid is performed. The lever solenoid control process (step Y118) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is terminated. This special figure 1 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
20 and 21 show the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game process is basically the same process as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit, that is, in the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being the big hit (step). Y131). Then, in the case of the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y134. Further, when the big hit of the special figure 1 is not performed (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y133) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be sent to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Process. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the specific area is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. Based on the fact that this specific area passage flag is set, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y134), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135). Then, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y153. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. (Step Y136).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y137), and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is extended to the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The variable timer value (for example, 60,000 msec) is saved (step Y138), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal gaming state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at one time even if the upper limit value is set as the initial value of the timer. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for a specified time (for example, 60,000 msec).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. Set (step Y139). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired (step Y140), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is performed (step Y141).

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game are monitored. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 2 Normal processing (step Y142) is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y143).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or each big hit type. The special figure 2 display processing (step Y144) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special drawing 2 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y147) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs is set, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. The small hit fanfare process (step Y149) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y150) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. conduct.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y151) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y153), the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y154) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the lever solenoid is performed. The lever solenoid control process (step Y155) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is terminated. This special figure 2 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing. The corresponding processing will be explained in parallel in.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 22 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the change is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 2 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 1 is not variable startable (step Y201; N), "0" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y217), Special Figure 1 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step Y202; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), the effect command setting process (step Y204) is performed, and the left-handed instruction notification flag is set. (Step Y205). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the specific game state ends, so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed when the normal game state is entered.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206), and if the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process (step Y208) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y210). ), The effect command setting process (step Y211) is performed. At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y212), and the effect command setting process (step Y213) is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y214). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special gaming state which is a special gaming state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates that there is a second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the change is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game, which is a big hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 is not variable startable (step Y221; N), "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y239), Special Figure 2 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222).

Then, when the number of reserved figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and an effect command setting process (step Y224) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226). ), The effect command setting process (step Y227) is performed. At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y226), the special figure 2 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the current special figure 2 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number, which is -1 from the number, is prepared. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y228), and the effect command setting process (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y230). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y232). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has started (step Y234), and when it has not started (step Y234; N), the customer waiting demo has been started. Performs processing related to state setting. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y232; N), when special figure 1 is changing (step Y233; Y), or when the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y234; Y). Goes to step Y238.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y235), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and the effect is produced. The command setting process (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the information on the gaming state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). This makes it possible for the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 24A shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y241). Next, a random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y242), and the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y243), a fall lottery process (step Y244) for drawing a transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed. It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the missed information or the jackpot information as the result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. The symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. Then, in order to perform the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern, and to refer to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of the above is set, is prepared (step Y248).

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y250) is performed, and the time reduction variation number update process (step Y251) is performed. Next, "1" related to the special figure 1 changing process is set as the process number (step Y252), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y254), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step Y256). Here, 100 ms) is saved (step Y257), the initial value (here, “0” indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during special figure 1 change (step Y258), and special figure 1 change start processing is performed. To finish.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 24B shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y261). Next, a random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y262), and the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y263), a fall lottery process (step Y264) for drawing a transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed. It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the missed information, the jackpot information, or the small hit information is performed as the result information of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. Special figure 2 Stop symbol setting processing (step Y266) is performed. Then, in order to perform the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern, and to refer to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of FIG. 2 is set, is prepared (step Y268).

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y270) is performed, and the time reduction variation start update process (step Y271) is performed. Next, "1" related to the special figure 2 changing process is set as the process number (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y274), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step Y276). Here, 100 ms) is saved (step Y277), the initial value (here, “0” indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the change in the special figure 2 (step Y278), and the special figure 2 change start process is performed. To finish.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. This makes it possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 25 shows a fall lottery process (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process. In this fall lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step Y581), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the fall lottery process is terminated. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y581; Y), it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582). It should be noted that winning the fall lottery means that the fall lottery random number matches the fall lottery determination value. The fall lottery judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the fall lottery random number is equal to or higher than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the fall lottery judgment value, and is the upper limit value of the fall lottery judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, it is determined that the fall lottery has been won.

If the value of the fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583).
If the value of the fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step X583; N), that is, when the fall lottery is won, the process for shifting to the low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, the signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON, and the big hit 4 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y586), and the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y587). After that, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the fall lottery process is completed. As a result, it becomes a low-probability state and a state without normal electric support, and shifts to a normal game state. Information on the end of the high-probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as changing the effect mode based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 26A shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y282), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y282). Step Y283).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y284), and when it is a jackpot (step Y284; Y), the jackpot flag 1 is set. End the process. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is a jackpot (step Y286; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y281 (step). Y287), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is not a jackpot (step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 26B shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of hold 1). Step Y294).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and if it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.
Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y292 (step). Y298), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit according to whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the large hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 27 shows the jackpot determination process (steps Y285, Y296) in the above-mentioned jackpot flag 1 setting process and jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step Y313).

Then, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step Y316). Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step Y316).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; N), that is, when it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step Y318), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 28 shows a small hit determination process (step Y299) in the above-mentioned large hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target large hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; N), that is, when it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y324), and the small hit determination process is performed. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 29 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y246) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special figure 1 display device 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 1 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y338), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and move to step Y340. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y341) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special figure 1 Ends the stop symbol setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 30 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y266) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 2 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y368), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and move to step Y370. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and when it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number. The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y376). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y377), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y378). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y379), and the process proceeds to step Y370.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y380), and the miss stop symbol pattern is set as a special figure. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y370). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y371) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373), and the special figure 2 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 displays the result of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the variation mode information in the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. It is the first decision-making means that can be decided before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 displays the result of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) and the variation mode information in the second variation display game based on the second start storage stored in the second start storage means. It serves as a second decision-making means that can be decided before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the starting winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the normal variable winning device 37 is the game ball fired on the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and the second determination is made in the normal state (normal game state). The variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the second variable display game by the means is longer than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the first variable display game by the first determination means. Become.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Examples include variable commands that contain information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 forms the first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing.
Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time for each of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time has elapsed. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set, but in this case, the information about the variation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the variation time is long variation. You may want to send a command that only indicates that. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, the stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the variation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on the reception of the stop command. To do so. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the burden of control on the effect control device 300.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 31 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y402), and the special figure 1 information setting process is performed. FIG. 1 It is determined whether or not the jackpot, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is the jackpot stop symbol pattern (step Y403). In the case of a special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y403; N), the special figure 1 hold number is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y405), and the special figure 1 information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
In this way, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 hold number only in the first half fluctuation pattern in the case of a miss, and in the case of a big hit, consider the special figure 1 hold number. The fluctuation pattern is determined without.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal gaming state) (step Y421). Special figure Low probability & No time reduction When it is not in the middle (step Y421; N), it is determined whether it is the time reduction final variation (step Y427). Here, when the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special gaming state, it is determined that the time-reduced final variation is achieved.

Then, in the case of the time reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), the process proceeds to step Y428. If the time is not the final variation (step Y427; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424), the process proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether the final variation has a high probability (step Y427). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability.
Then, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y427; Y), the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final variation are set (step Y428), and the process proceeds to step Y425.
Further, when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y429). Then, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y429; N), the first half offset data for the low probability special figure 2 miss / small hit is set (step Y430), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. Is set (step Y432), and the process proceeds to step Y425.

Further, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (Step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y426), and the special figure 2 information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the number of reserved special figures 2.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 33 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special map fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y451), the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is performed. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the holding number 1) of FIG. 1 (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and if the special figure 1 is off (step Y454; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step Y455) is performed. )I do. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), the distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the hit type and the missed type. Specifically, the size for hitting is 1 byte size, and the size for losing is 2 bytes. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to enable a wider variety of production, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1. And prepare (step Y458). Next, a distribution process (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1. Prepare (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the holding number 1) of FIG. 2 (step Y473).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y474), and if the special figure 2 is off (step Y474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step Y475) is performed. )I do. If the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y474; N), the distribution process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 2. And prepare (step Y478). Next, a distribution process (step Y479) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 2. Prepare (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250, Y270) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y552), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y553). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y557).

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, as the above-mentioned added value, the remaining time (time less than 60,000 msec) excluding the time that can be timed by using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for the specified time (here, 60,000 msec), is the added value. It is calculated as.

After that, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y558; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the length variation of the special figure 2 has started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set in the normal gaming state of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

Then, when it is not the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step Y559; N), 0 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y560). Further, in the case of the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y562), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y563), and the effect command setting process (step Y564) is performed. conduct. Next, the number of pending targets is updated by -1 (step Y566), the contents of the target random number storage area are shifted (step Y566), the free area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the fluctuation start information is set. End the process.

In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set for the length variation of the special figure 2 in order to vary the time that is not enough for the 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the timer of 60,000 msec and the number of repetitions of 9 are saved as the addition result, the timer is subtracted by the timer interrupt process, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 to the game processing timer of 60,000 m. Set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 becomes 10 minutes (= 60,000 ms × 10). Since the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, it can be expressed by multiplying by 60 seconds.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 36 shows the time-reduced fluctuation number update processing (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this time reduction fluctuation frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in the high probability (during the high probability state) (step Y571), and when the special figure is in the high probability (step Y571; Y), the time is reached. The shortened fluctuation count update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure is not in high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether the special figure time is shortened (step Y571). Then, when the special time reduction is not in progress (step Y572; N), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step Y572; Y), the time reduction variation number is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the time reduction variation number is "0" (step Y574). ..

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step Y574; Y), the signal related to the end of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575). , Signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, normal electric accessory 1 open extension (Turn off the status signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578), and the normal figure game mode flag area is saved. The flag for no time reduction is saved in (step Y579), and the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and the effect command setting process (step Y623) is performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process (step Y625) is performed. Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fluctuation is stopped. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In the present embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 msec is set in the case of a miss and 2000 msec in the case of a big hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If it is out of the special figure 1 (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. Further, if the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being performed (step Y629). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result. Note that even if the variable display game in Special Figure 2 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of the special figure 2 is being performed (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. Further, when the special figure 2 display is not being processed (step Y629; N), the number of symbol confirmation counts is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. Display time + Display time of 4 msec is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and the effect command setting process (step Y635) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), the effect command setting process (step Y638) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y638) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and the information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area. (Step Y640), the information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y643) is performed to perform the special figure 1 stop symbol area. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting process (step Y653) is performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 msec in the case of a miss, 600 msec in the case of a big hit, and 136 msec in the case of a small hit is set.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If it is out of the special figure 2 (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Further, if the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670) and the decorative special figure 1 is interrupted. A command is prepared (step Y671), an effect command setting process (step Y672) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y673.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit. It should be noted that even if the variable display game of Special Figure 1 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted at the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display processing is in progress (step Y660). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result. Note that even if the variable display game in Special Figure 1 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of Special Figure 1 is in progress (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. Further, when the special figure 1 display is not being processed (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the special figure 2 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. Display time + Display time of 4 msec is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even if the special figure 1 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process (step Y666) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process (step Y668) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and is the special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Determine (step Y674). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step). Y675), load information from the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and save it in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y676). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678) is performed to perform the special figure 2 stop symbol area. Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
FIG. 39 shows the process during display of the special figure 1 (step Y111) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared. (Step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is the big hit information (step Y753), and when the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), the special figure 1 variable display game. The test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y755), and the effect command setting process (step Y756) is performed. After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and an effect command setting process (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of this embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y764) is performed to end the processing during display of the special figure 1.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, when the big hit flag 1 is off information, it is determined whether it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765), and when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765). In step Y765; N), it is determined whether or not the time is shortened final variation (step Y766). Here, when the fall lottery for the running special figure 1 variation display game is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special gaming state, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final variation is made.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. Further, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y765; Y) or a time-reduced final variation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and an effect command is provided. Perform the setting process (step Y768). Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770), and the small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress, that is, Special Figure 2 It is determined whether or not a special gaming state is executed based on the result of the variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

If the small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y771; Y), the process proceeds to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in FIG. 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y774), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775), and the special figure 1 Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
40 and 41 show the process during display of the special figure 2 (step Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. The special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear two areas (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 area in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is the big hit information (step Y815), and when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variation display game. The test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y817), and the effect command setting process (step Y818) is performed. After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and the effect command setting process (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of this embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y822), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y826) is performed to end the processing during display of the special figure 2.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, when the big hit flag 2 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). .. Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y827; Y), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y828), and when it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N), the time is reached. It is determined whether the final variation is shortened (step Y829). Here, when the fall lottery for the running special figure 2 variation display game is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special gaming state, it is determined that the final variation is shortened.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. Further, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y828; Y) or a time-reduced final variation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and an effect command is provided. Perform the setting process (step Y831). Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the player is not aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, a command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y834), and the effect command setting process (step Y835) is performed. Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), an effect command setting process (step Y837) is performed, and a signal related to a right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.
After that, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the lower prize opening is cleared (step Y840), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the flag area of the illegal monitoring period of the lower winning opening (step Y841), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing is performed. The transition setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the process of displaying the special figure 2 is terminated.

Further, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843), and when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843; N), the time is shortened. It is determined whether it is the final variation (step Y844). Here, when the fall lottery for the running special figure 2 variation display game is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special gaming state, it is determined that the final variation is shortened.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y843; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. Further, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y843; Y) or a time-reduced final variation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and an effect command is provided. Perform the setting process (step Y846). Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y847), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851), and the special figure 2 is Ends the process being displayed.

That is, based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result, the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the conditional device. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without the operation of the conditional device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
42 and 43 show fanfare / interval processing (steps Y112, Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y941; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y942).

If it is not the first round (step Y942; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, in the case of the first round (step Y942; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943). Here, in the present embodiment, the special gaming state is started by the game ball passing through the normal drawing start gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure variation display game. There is.

If the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943; Y), the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is set. The value (10 in the case of this embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y945). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the upper prize opening is cleared (step Y947), and the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the area of the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y948). After that, the on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y950). Then, the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y951), and the effect command setting process (step Y952) is performed.

Next, the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y954), and the jackpot prize is won. The large winning opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). As the initial value of the processing control pointer during the big hit, 0 is set when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In this embodiment, long opening with V corresponds. Further, when opening once in one round, the jackpot operation end value (2 in the case of this embodiment) is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Next, it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round. Then, in the case of the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y960). Then, in the case of the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y960; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save to (step Y962). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y960; N), that is, if it is the big hit of the special figure 2, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y963), and the big winning opening is opened. The time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, the signal relating to the opening start of the upper prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y965). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening / closing member of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The number of large winning openings is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the special gaming state based on the big hit (first special gaming state), only the upper big winning opening (first special variable device 38) is open and small. In the special gaming state based on the hit (second special gaming state), only the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening mode in the first special gaming state may be such that the upper prize opening is opened in the first round and the lower prize opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y115) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 big hit end process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data has no time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1102) is performed. Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, the specific area passage flag is set when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area), and when this specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. .. If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). (Step Y1107).

If the passage is not irregular in the specific region (step Y1107; N), the process proceeds to step Y1109. On the other hand, when the passage is irregular in a specific area (step Y1107; Y), the irregular probability change information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108), and the effect command setting process (step Y1109) is performed. By the process of step Y1109, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands containing the effect mode information in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation region, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 1 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1110), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1111). Next, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1115), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (for example, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is terminated.

By performing this special figure 1 big hit end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing to start the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117, the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. 2 Variable display A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the game from being executed.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. The special figure 2 big hit end process is the same process except that step Y1109 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process is not performed. In this special figure 2 big hit end process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). If the time reduction determination data has no time reduction in step Y1131, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1132) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction in step Y1131, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1131) is performed. Step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is information passing through a specific area (step Y1134; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the passage is irregular in the specific region, which is the inflow of the (step Y1137).

If the passage is not irregular in the specific region (step Y1137; N), the process proceeds to step Y1139. On the other hand, when the passage is irregular in the specific area (step Y1137; Y), the irregular probability change information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138), and the effect command setting process (step Y1139) is performed. By the process of step Y1139, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands containing the effect mode information in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation region, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 2 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1140), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1141). Next, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1145), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1146), the special figure 2 big hit end process is completed. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 46A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102, 1132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, the signal relating to the start without time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, only the data is set and no output is made.

Next, the signal relating to the start without time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, the special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, the normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, and the ordinary electric accessory. 1 Set the open extension status signal to OFF.
After that, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1153), and the normal time reduction flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step Y1154). Next, the special figure low probability and no time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time reduction fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1157). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated. By this process, it becomes a normal game state.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 46B shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103, 1133) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal related to the start of the time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start with a time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, the special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, the normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, and the ordinary electric accessory. 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1163), and the flag with the time reduction is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step Y1164). Next, the special figure low probability and the time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the initial time saving fluctuation number area for managing the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is initially set. Save the value (step Y1166). In the case of this embodiment, since the number of times of support is 100, 100 is saved as an initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By this processing, it becomes the second specific game state with a low probability of special figure. In the case of this embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the big hit end setting process 2 does not make the right-handed setting.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 47 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, the signal relating to the start of the special figure time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1171). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start with high probability and time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON. After that, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1173), and the special figure high probability and the time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1175). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated. This process results in a high probability state. That is, by executing the big hit end setting process 3 after the big hit end setting process 1, the first specific game state is set, and by executing the big hit end setting process 3 after the big hit end setting process 2, the special figure high probability is achieved. It becomes the second specific game state.
By the above processing, it becomes possible to set a specific gaming state which is a high probability state after the end of the first special gaming state. That is, the game control device 100 has a specific game state (first specific game state ST2, special figure high probability second specific game state ST3) in which the probability that the result of the special variation display game becomes a special result is higher than the normal state. Is a means for generating a specific game state that can generate.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
FIG. 48 shows the small hit fanfare middle process (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this small hit fanfare middle process, first, a small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process (step Y1202) is performed. Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1203), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (special electric accessory 2 operating signal is turned ON) is a test signal. Save to the output data area (step Y1206). Then, the lower prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1207), the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1208), and the small The processing during the hit fanfare is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (step Y1337), and if the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. do. Further, when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (step Y1337; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y), the decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and the effect command setting process (step Y1342) is performed. After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device 100 is one of the variable display game execution control means of either the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) or the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100). When the execution control of the variable display game of the other is performed, and the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one of the variable display games is played. It serves as a resumption control means capable of executing a resumption control of discontinuing and resuming one of the variable display games that was interrupted after the special gaming state based on the other variable display game was completed.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 50 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 50, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the initial setting of the CPU is performed (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18. C18), a movable body control process (step C19) that controls the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44, and a board effect setting process that controls the effect by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. (Step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 51 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to the process of step C204. When it is determined that the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 52 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that the MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the one-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of the look-ahead variable system command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the start memory (holding) in which the special figure change display game has not been executed becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be displayed. It is a production such as performing a production display. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 53 shows a variable command process (step C236) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

When this special figure type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special symbol type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are changed. It is determined whether there is an inconsistency (step C363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variable command process is terminated. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 16R jackpot symbol, a 10R jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, it is similar to the case where the deviation command (variation pattern command) is received but the symbol command of the 16R jackpot symbol is received. It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure change is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, "during special map change" means that the special figure is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing is terminated.

[Variable effect setting process]
FIG. 54 shows the variation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-mentioned variation system command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C381). When the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode at that time is set (step C382). The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and is naturally different depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability variation mode, and the like. Further, each mode is provided with a plurality of modes in which the distribution rate of the advance notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the reserved number of MODE and special figure type is acquired (step C383). As a result, in the case of non-reach variation, it is possible to change the lottery content of the advance notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each advance notice effect mode) that appears during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, the notice lottery that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (step C381; N), the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special symbol type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half is changing using the first half notice distribution group table. The notice lottery that appears in is performed (step C386).

Next, a lottery will be drawn for the advance notice of changes in the second half. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation display in a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of multiple columns of the special figure is a big hit). Is stopped and variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second half is changing (during reach) using the second half notice distribution group table. A lottery for the notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and the content of the effect corresponding to the notice lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, the production and notice of the variable time of the decorative special figure variation display game and the main reach contents will be determined. Further, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol is performed with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.), notice content, and game state of the special map variation display game (step C392).

Next, the display setting of the variable effect is set (step C393), and the display setting of the advance notice effect is set (step C394). By these processes, it becomes possible to execute the effect and the advance notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. After that, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decorative start memory display in response to the corresponding decrease in the start memory when the special figure variation display game is started.

Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C396), and the decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is performed. Set the display (step C397). Further, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). , Ends the variable effect setting process.

<Small hit>
As described above, there may be a plurality of types of opening modes (opening time and number of times of opening) in the second special gaming state (special gaming state based on small hits), and in that case, for example, any of them is based on the small hit symbol. Decide whether to set (adopt) the opening mode. That is, the small hit type may be not one type but a plurality of types.
FIG. 55A shows an example of the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won when there are three types of small hits: the first small hit, the second small hit, and the third small hit. .. Further, FIGS. 55 (b) to 55 (d) show an example of the opening mode in each small hit type.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the special gaming state based on the first small hit, the small hit fanfare time is first started, and when the small hit fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is released. The second special variable winning device 39 is closed when either the condition that the openable time of 1600 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls is won is satisfied. After that, the small hit remaining ball processing time is started, when the small hit remaining ball processing time ends, the small hit ending time starts, and when the small hit ending time ends, the second special gaming state ends. That is, in the special gaming state based on the first small hit, the number of times of opening is set to one, and the opening time (openable time) is set to 1600 msec.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), in the special gaming state based on the second small hit, the number of times of opening is set to 2, and the opening time (opening time) of each opening is set to 1600 msec. ing.
Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), in the special gaming state based on the third small hit, the number of times of opening is set to 3, and the opening time (opening time) of each opening is set to 1600 msec. ing.
As shown in FIG. 55 (a), the first small hit that generates the second special gaming state with one opening number includes the second small hit that generates the second special gaming state with two opening times. A higher distribution probability is set as compared with the third small hit that generates the second special gaming state in which the number of times of opening is three. That is, it is rare that the result of the special figure variation display game is the second small hit or the third small hit.

In the stop symbol setting process (step C392) of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54), the effect control device 300 sets the stop symbol on the display device 41 based on the decorative special symbol command from the game control device 100.
Specifically, when the information about the stop symbol included in the decorative special symbol command is the information about the stop symbol corresponding to the first small hit, the first small hit symbol is set as the stop symbol. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed as a result of the decorative special figure variation display game. In this embodiment, "123 (a combination of symbols arranged in the order of" 1 "," 2 ", and" 3 "from the left)" is used as the first small hit symbol, but the first small hit symbol is limited to "123". It can be changed as appropriate.

If the information about the stop symbol included in the decorative special symbol command is the information about the stop symbol corresponding to the second small hit, the second small hit symbol is set as the stop symbol. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the second small hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed as a result of the decorative special figure variation display game. In this embodiment, "234 (a combination of symbols arranged in the order of" 2 "," 3 ", and" 4 "from the left)" is used as the second small hit symbol, but the second small hit symbol is limited to "234". It can be changed as appropriate.
If the information about the stop symbol included in the decorative special symbol command is the information about the stop symbol corresponding to the third small hit, the third small hit symbol is set as the stop symbol. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the third small hit symbol (“345”) is stopped and displayed as a result of the decorative special figure variation display game. In this embodiment, "345 (a combination of symbols arranged in the order of" 3 "," 4 ", and" 5 "from the left)" is used as the third small hit symbol, but the third small hit symbol is limited to "345". It can be changed as appropriate.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the display device 41. A decorative special figure game display unit 42a for displaying is provided. In the decoration special figure game display unit 42a, the decoration identification information (large pattern) is variablely displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas, and then stopped and displayed to display the decorative special figure variable display game (first decorative game). Is displayed.
Further, in the corner of the display area of the display device 41 (for example, the lower right), the decoration identification information (small) that is relatively smaller than the decoration identification information (large pattern) that is variablely displayed on the decoration special figure game display unit 42a. A small symbol variation display unit 42b for varyingly displaying the symbol) is provided. In the small symbol variation display unit 42b, the decoration identification information (small symbol) is variablely displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas, and then stopped and displayed to play a decorative special symbol variable display game (second decorative game). indicate.
In this embodiment, the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the irregular variation is not displayed, but it may be displayed.

Further, in the corner of the display area of the display device 41 (for example, the lower left), there is a waiting hold display unit 42c for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the main variation among the undigested start memories. It will be provided. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby hold display unit 42c has a one-to-one correspondence with the start memory of the main variation, and is displayed side by side in the storage order. Of the decorative special figure start memory displays displayed on the standby hold display unit 42c, the decorative special figure start memory display at the right end is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the main variation stored first. , It is designed to move to the right each time it is digested.
The effect control device 300 can execute the look-ahead effect on the standby display unit 42c. Specifically, the degree of expectation (or the corresponding special figure variation display) that the result of the corresponding special figure variation display game becomes a big hit depending on the display mode of the decorative special figure start storage display displayed on the waiting hold display unit 42c. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the fluctuation pattern of the game will be a specific fluctuation pattern).
In the drawing, the waiting hold display unit 42c is surrounded by a alternate long and short dash line for convenience, but the actual waiting hold display unit 42c may or may not be surrounded by a line or the like.

Further, in the corner (for example, the lower part) of the display area of the display device 41, on the right side of the waiting display unit 42c, information on the start memory corresponding to the currently running special figure variation display game is displayed. The running hold display unit 42d is provided. At the start of the main fluctuation, the decorative special figure start storage display on the right end of the decorative special figure start storage display displayed on the waiting hold display unit 42c is moved to the running hold display unit 42d. It has become.
The effect control device 300 can execute the advance notice effect on the pending display unit 42d. Specifically, the degree of expectation (or the running special figure) that the result of the running special figure variation display game will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running hold display unit 42d. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game will be a specific fluctuation pattern).
In the drawing, for convenience, the running hold display unit 42d is surrounded by a alternate long and short dash line, but the actual running hold display unit 42d may or may not be surrounded by a line or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first small hit symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a and the first small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b are the same symbol, but the decorative special is used. The first small hit symbol displayed on the game display unit 42a may be different from the first small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second small hit symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a and the second small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b are the same symbol, but the decorative special is used. The second small hit symbol displayed on the game display unit 42a may be different from the second small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b.
Further, in the present embodiment, the third small hit symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a and the third small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b are the same symbol, but the decorative special is used. The third small hit symbol displayed on the game display unit 42a may be different from the third small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b, the second small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b, and the small symbol variation display unit 42b are displayed. The first small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b, the second small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b, and the small symbol are different from the third small hit symbol. At least two of the third small hit symbols displayed on the variable display unit 42b may be the same symbol.

<Small hit design replacement production>
When there are a plurality of types of small hits, the effect control device 300 can execute the small hit symbol replacement effect of replacing the small hit symbols. In the present embodiment, as a small hit symbol replacement effect, when the special symbol variation display game that is the first small hit is continuously executed, the first small hit symbol is changed to the second small hit symbol or the third small hit. Perform the effect of replacing with a pattern.

First, an example of display on the display device 41 when the small hit symbol replacement effect is not executed will be described with reference to FIG. 57.
When the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode) starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the first specific game state ST2 is set in the corner portion (for example, the upper right portion) of the display area of the display device 41. A cumulative prize ball number display unit 42e showing the number of prize balls acquired so far from the start is provided. When the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), the decorative special figure game display unit 42a and the small symbol variation display are displayed. In the unit 42b, after the decoration identification information is variablely displayed (variablely displayed at a speed that is difficult to identify) in a high-speed variable mode, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed.

Next, a special gaming state based on the first small hit (a second special gaming state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs. When the second special gaming state occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), the number of prize balls acquired in the second special gaming state is shown in the corner portion (for example, the upper left portion) of the display area of the display device 41. A prize ball number display unit 42f is provided. In the present embodiment, since the large prize opening has 15 prize balls, for example, as shown in FIGS. 57 (c) and 57 (d), every time a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening, the prize ball number display unit 42f The value is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (e), during the ending time of the second special gaming state, the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f shifts to the cumulative prize ball number display unit 42e to display the cumulative prize ball number display. It is added to the value of the part 42e.

Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (f), the decorative special figure game display unit 42a and the small symbol variation display unit 42b change the decoration identification information in a high-speed variation mode. The display starts. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (g), in the decorative special figure game display unit 42a and the small symbol variation display unit 42b, The first small hit symbol ("123") is stopped and displayed.

Next, a special gaming state based on the first small hit (a second special gaming state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (h), every time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening. The value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (i), the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball number display unit 42e during the ending time of the second special gaming state.

Next, an example of the display on the display device 41 in the case of executing the small hit symbol replacement effect in which the first small hit symbol is replaced with the second small hit symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 58.
When the execution of the small hit symbol replacement effect is set (the second small hit symbol replacement flag (described later) is set) and the first special symbol variation display game is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the decoration is displayed. In the special figure game display unit 42a and the small symbol variation display unit 42b, the variation display of the decoration identification information in the high-speed variation mode is started. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display unit 42b. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, the second small hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a. That is, in the small hit symbol replacement effect of the present embodiment, only the small hit symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a is replaced, and the small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b is not replaced. It has become like.

Next, a special game state based on the first small hit (the second special game state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and as shown in FIGS. 58 (c) and 58 (d), for example, a game ball is placed in the large winning opening. Every time a prize is won, the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball number display unit 42e during the ending time of the second special gaming state.

Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (f), the small symbol variation display unit 42b starts high-speed variation display (variation display in the high-speed variation mode) of the decoration identification information. To. On the other hand, in the decorative special figure game display unit 42a, the temporary stop display (variable display in the temporary stop mode) of the second small hit symbol is started. That is, in the small hit symbol replacement effect of the present embodiment, not only the small hit symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a but also the variable display game displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a (first). The variation mode of the decoration game) is also replaced. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (g), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display unit 42b. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, the second small hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a.

Next, a special gaming state based on the first small hit (the second special gaming state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (h), every time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening. The value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (i), the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball number display unit 42e during the ending time of the second special gaming state.

Next, an example of the display on the display device 41 in the case of executing the small hit symbol replacement effect in which the first small hit symbol is replaced with the third small hit symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 59.
When the execution of the small hit symbol replacement effect is set (the third small hit symbol replacement flag (described later) is set) and the first special symbol variation display game is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the decoration is displayed. In the special figure game display unit 42a and the small symbol variation display unit 42b, the variation display of the decoration identification information in the high-speed variation mode is started. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display unit 42b. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, the third small hit symbol (“345”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a.

Next, a special gaming state based on the first small hit (a second special gaming state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), every time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening. The value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball number display unit 42e during the ending time of the second special gaming state.

Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), the small symbol variation display unit 42b starts high-speed variation display (variation display in the high-speed variation mode) of the decoration identification information. To. On the other hand, in the decorative special figure game display unit 42a, the temporary stop display (variable display in the temporary stop mode) of the third small hit symbol is started. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (f), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display unit 42b. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, the third small hit symbol (“345”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a.

Next, a special gaming state based on the first small hit (a second special gaming state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (g), every time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening. The value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (h), the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball number display unit 42e during the ending time of the second special gaming state.

Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (i), the small symbol variation display unit 42b starts high-speed variation display (variation display in the high-speed variation mode) of the decoration identification information. To. On the other hand, in the decorative special figure game display unit 42a, the temporary stop display (variable display in the temporary stop mode) of the third small hit symbol is started. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (j), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display unit 42b. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, the third small hit symbol (“345”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a.

Next, a special game state based on the first small hit (the second special game state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is updated by +15 every time the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening. Will be done. Then, during the ending time of the second special gaming state, the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball number display unit 42e.
In FIGS. 57 to 59, the waiting hold display unit 42c and the running hold display unit 42d are displayed, but the waiting hold display unit 42c and the running hold display unit 42d are not displayed. good.

In order to execute the small hit symbol replacement effect, the effect control device 300 performs a small hit symbol replacement effect determination process, for example, at the end of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54) (that is, after step C398).
FIG. 60A shows an example of the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process. In this small hit symbol replacement effect determination process, first, it is determined whether the second small hit symbol replacement flag or the third small hit symbol replacement flag is set (step C401), and the second small hit symbol replacement is performed. When both the flag and the third small hit symbol replacement flag are not set (step C401; N), it is determined whether the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) is the first small hit symbol. Determination (step C402).

When the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is not the first small hit symbol (step C402; N), that is, the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is an off symbol, a big hit symbol, a second small hit symbol, or a third. If it is a small hit symbol, the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is the first small hit symbol (step C402; Y), that is, when the result of the special figure variation display game this time is the first small hit, the small hit. A lottery for the symbol replacement effect, specifically, a random number lottery for determining whether or not to execute the small hit symbol replacement effect is performed (step C403).

If the lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect is lost (step C404; N), the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect is won (step C404; Y), the result of the next special symbol variation display game is the first small based on the pre-reading stop symbol command from the game control device 100. It is determined whether it is a hit (step C405).

When the result of the next special figure variation display game is not the first small hit (step C405; N), that is, the result of the next special figure variation display game is off, and the big hit, the second small hit, or the third small hit. If there is, or if the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the next special symbol variation display game has not been received, the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the result of the next special figure fluctuation display game is the first small hit (step C405; Y), the special figure fluctuation display game of the next time is performed based on the look-ahead stop symbol command from the game control device 100. It is determined whether the result is the first small hit (step C406).

When the result of the next special figure fluctuation display game is not the first small hit (step C406; N), that is, the result of the next special figure fluctuation display game is off, and the big hit, the second small hit, or the third small hit. If there is, or if the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the next special symbol variation display game has not been received, the stop symbol (first small hit symbol) set in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) is used as the first stop symbol. Replace with 2 small hit symbols (step C407), set the 2nd small hit symbol replacement flag (step C408), set "1" for the number of consecutive times (step C409), and determine the small hit symbol replacement effect. End the process.
In step C407, only the information of the stop symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a is rewritten, and the information of the stop symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b is not rewritten. As a result, when the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation display game (that is, the first special symbol fluctuation display game in which the execution of the small hit symbol replacement effect is set (the second small hit symbol replacement flag is set)) is stopped, The first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b, and the second small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a (see FIG. 58 (b)).

On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game one after another is the first small hit (step C406; Y), the stop symbol (first small hit symbol) set in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) is the first. Replace with 3 small hit symbols (step C410), set the 3rd small hit symbol replacement flag (step C411), set "2" for the number of consecutive times (step C412), and determine the small hit symbol replacement effect. End the process.
In step C410, only the information of the stop symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a is rewritten, and the information of the stop symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b is not rewritten. As a result, when the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation display game (that is, the first special symbol fluctuation display game in which the execution of the small hit symbol replacement effect is set (the third small hit symbol replacement flag is set)) is stopped, The first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b, and the third small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a (see FIG. 59 (b)).

Further, when the second small hit symbol replacement flag or the third small hit symbol replacement flag is set (step C401; Y), that is, the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is the next special symbol change. If it is executed in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54) executed at the start of the display game or the start of the next special figure variable display game, the decorative special figure set in step C397 of the variable effect setting process. The variation is replaced with the stop symbol set in step C392 of the variation effect setting process (step C413).

Specifically, when the second small hit symbol replacement flag is set, the decoration special symbol variation (variation display in the high-speed variation mode of the decoration identification information) set in step C397 is displayed as the second small hit symbol. The stop symbol (first small hit symbol) set in step C392 is replaced with the second small hit symbol, while being replaced with the variable display in the temporary stop mode of. In step C413, only the information of the decorative special symbol fluctuation and the stop symbol displayed on the decorative special symbol game display unit 42a is rewritten, and the information of the decorative special symbol fluctuation and the stop symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b is rewritten. There is no such thing. As a result, during the fluctuation of the next special figure variation display game, the decoration identification information is displayed in high-speed fluctuation on the small symbol variation display unit 42b, and the second small hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the decoration special symbol game display unit 42a. (Refer to FIG. 58 (f)), and when the fluctuation of the next special figure fluctuation display game is stopped, the first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the small symbol fluctuation display unit 42b, and the decorative special figure game display unit 42a is displayed. The second small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in (see FIG. 58 (g)).

Further, when the third small hit symbol replacement flag is set, the decoration special symbol fluctuation (variation display in the high-speed fluctuation mode of the decoration identification information) set in step C397 is temporarily stopped by the third small hit symbol. In addition to replacing the variable display in the mode, the stop symbol (first small hit symbol) set in step C392 is replaced with the third small hit symbol. In step C413, only the information of the decorative special symbol fluctuation and the stop symbol displayed on the decorative special symbol game display unit 42a is rewritten, and the information of the decorative special symbol fluctuation and the stop symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b is rewritten. There is no such thing. As a result, during the fluctuation of the next special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game, the decoration identification information is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation display on the small symbol fluctuation display unit 42b, and at the same time, the decoration special figure game display unit 42a is displayed. 3 The small hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 59 (e) and 59 (i)), and when the fluctuation of the next special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game is stopped, the small symbol fluctuation display unit 42b The first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and the third small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a (see FIGS. 59 (f) and 59 (j)).

Next, the number of consecutive times is updated by -1 (step C414), and it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive times is 0 (step C415).
When the number of consecutive times is not 0 (step C415; N), that is, when the third small hit symbol replacement flag is set, the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is the next special symbol variation display game. If it is executed in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54) executed at the start of, the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the number of consecutive times is 0 (step C415; Y), that is, when the second small hit symbol replacement flag is set, the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is the next special figure. When it is executed in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54) executed at the start of the variation display game, or when the third small hit symbol replacement flag is set, the small hit symbol replacement is performed. When the effect determination process is executed in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54) executed at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the set small hit symbol replacement flag is cleared (step). C416), the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), when the special figure variation display game which is the first small hit is executed twice in succession, the large winning openings are 2 in total. In order to open the game twice, a small hit symbol replacement effect of replacing the second small hit symbol indicating that the number of times of opening is two is executed. In this small hit symbol replacement effect, the control of displaying the second small hit symbol once is performed instead of the control of displaying the first small hit symbol twice (displaying twice with the high-speed fluctuation display in between).
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), when the special figure variation display game, which is the first small hit, is executed three times in a row, the large winning openings are opened three times in total, so that the number of times of opening is increased. The small hit symbol replacement effect of replacing with the third small hit symbol indicating that is 3 times is executed. In this small hit symbol replacement effect, the control of displaying the third small hit symbol once is performed instead of the control of displaying the first small hit symbol three times (displaying three times with the high-speed fluctuation display in between).

In the example shown in FIG. 61 (a), the result of the third game (the next special figure fluctuation display game) is out of order, but the result of the third game is other than the first small hit (third time). The result of the game is undecided, that is, the start memory corresponding to the third game is not stored).
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61 (b), the result of the fourth game is out of order, but the result of the fourth game is other than the first small hit (when the result of the fourth game is undecided). That is, the start memory corresponding to the fourth game is not stored).

FIG. 60B shows an example of the winning probability of the lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect. In the present embodiment, since the winning probability differs depending on the current probability setting value, the current probability setting value can be suggested by the small hit symbol. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the larger the current probability setting value, the higher the winning probability. That is, the larger the current probability setting value, the higher the probability of being replaced with the second small hit symbol or the third small hit symbol.

The jackpot probability can be changed by changing the probability setting value, but the small hit probability cannot be changed by changing the probability setting value. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine that cannot execute the small hit symbol replacement effect, the current probability setting value cannot be suggested by the appearance frequency of the first small hit symbol, the second small hit symbol, and the third small hit symbol. On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the small hit symbol replacement effect can be executed, and the larger the current probability setting value is, the higher the probability of being replaced with the second small hit symbol or the third small hit symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make a setting suggestion that is easy for the player to understand, that the higher the number of the second small hit symbol and the third small hit symbol appears, the higher the setting can be expected.
Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the special figure variation display game as the second small hit and the special figure variation display game as the third small hit are hardly executed. Therefore, since the difference in the appearance frequency of the second small hit symbol and the third small hit symbol becomes clear between the case where the current probability setting value is large and the case where the current probability setting value is small, it is possible to make a setting suggestion that is easier to understand. ing.

For example, it is possible to suggest settings by giving variations to the types of small hit symbols and the display method of small hit symbols. For example, when two types of first small hit symbols, a first small hit symbol A that is easier to be selected as the probability setting value is larger and a first small hit symbol B that is easier to be selected as the probability setting value is smaller, are provided. Even if the winning symbol replacement effect cannot be executed, it is possible to suggest the currently set probability setting value. Further, for example, the small hit symbol display method includes a first method of rolling and then stopping, and a second method of pitching and then stopping. The larger the probability setting value, the more the first method is selected. If it is easy and the smaller the probability setting value is, the easier it is to select the second method, it is possible to suggest the currently set probability setting value even if the small hit symbol replacement effect cannot be executed. However, in these cases, the amount of information increases when the small hits are continuous, which may confuse the player.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the small hit symbol replacement effect can be executed, the setting suggestion is made only by the display count (stop display count) of the small hit symbol using the minimum required small hit symbol. Since this can be done, the player will not be confused even if small hits occur continuously due to rapid fluctuations.

In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the larger the probability setting value, the higher the winning probability in the lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect, but the larger the probability setting value, the smaller the hit. It is also possible to configure the lottery for the symbol replacement effect so that the winning probability is low.
Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the same winning probability is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2", but they are different from "setting 1" and "setting 2". Winning probabilities may be assigned. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6". That is, the winning probability is not limited as long as it can be switched in multiple stages.

Here, the temporary stop mode is, for example, a mode in which the decorative identification information is oscillatedly displayed at a fixed position. The direction of the swing in the temporary stop mode may be the same as the adjacent decoration identification information, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), or the adjacent decoration, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (d). The direction may be opposite to the identification information, but from the viewpoint of more easily grasping the accurate game situation, the direction of the swing in the temporary stop mode is preferably the opposite direction to the adjacent decoration identification information.
In the present embodiment, not only the decorative special figure game display unit 42a but also the small symbol variation display unit 42b is provided in the display area of the display device 41, and even if the lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect is won, the small symbol variation The stop pattern and the decorative special figure variation displayed on the display unit 42b are not replaced. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the accurate game situation by the decorative special figure variable display game (second decorative game) on the small symbol variable display unit 42b. For example, as shown in FIGS. 58 (f), 59 (e), and 59 (i), the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed on the decoration special figure game display unit 42a during the change of the special figure variation display game. However, since the decoration identification information is displayed in high-speed fluctuation in the small symbol fluctuation display unit 42b, if the small symbol fluctuation display unit 42b is viewed, the fluctuation is not stopped but is changing (execution of the special symbol fluctuation display game). It is inside). However, from the viewpoint of making it easier to grasp that the movement is in progress, it is preferable that the direction of the swing in the temporary stop mode is opposite to the adjacent decoration identification information, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (d). ..

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a game (special figure variable display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the variable winning device (first). A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state (first special gaming state, second special gaming state) that opens the special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39), rather than the game being executed. Prior to this, a pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining the game and a display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying the symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game on the display device 41 are provided, and the symbols are provided. The combination mode includes a first symbol combination mode (first small hit symbol) corresponding to the first special result (first small hit) of the special results, and a second special result (second small hit) of the special results. If there is a second symbol combination mode (second small hit symbol) corresponding to (hit) and the result of the game is the first special result, the number of times the variable winning device is opened is the first (1 time). ), And the result of the game is the second special result, the number of times the variable winning device is opened is N times (twice) the first number. When a special game state (second special game state) that becomes a certain second number of times (two times) occurs, and the display control means continues the game that becomes the first special result N times based on the judgment result of the pre-determination means. When it is determined, it is possible to execute a replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) in which the symbol combination mode displayed on the display device 41 is replaced. In the replacement effect, the control for displaying the first symbol combination mode N times is possible. Instead of, it is configured to control the display of the second symbol combination mode once (see FIG. 60 (a)).

That is, the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode before replacement (the total number of times of opening indicated by displaying the first symbol combination mode multiple times) and the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode after replacement (one second symbol combination). It is possible to execute a replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) that controls the display so that the number of openings indicated by the display of the mode is the same. Therefore, it is possible to combine the display of a plurality of symbol combination modes into one display of the symbol combination mode without changing the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode before and after the replacement. Therefore, the symbol combination mode (small hit symbol). Can enhance the interest of.
In particular, since small hits occur frequently in the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode), the display of a plurality of symbol combination modes can be combined into a single symbol combination mode display for the player. It is possible to make a simple and easy-to-understand display.

The first number of times is not limited to one time, and may be, for example, a plurality of times.
Further, the N times is not limited to 2 times, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a plurality of times. That is, the second number of times is not limited to two times, and can be changed as appropriate if it is a plurality of times.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a setting means (game) capable of setting one probability setting value from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game (special figure variation display game) is assigned. The control device 100) is provided, and the display control means (effect control device 300) executes a replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) with different selection rates according to the probability set value set by the setting means. It can be configured to select whether or not (see FIG. 60 (b)).
With this configuration, the probability setting value currently set can be suggested by the appearance frequency of the first symbol combination mode and the second symbol combination mode, so that the symbol combination mode (small hit symbol) is interesting. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination mode further includes a third symbol combination mode (third small hit symbol) corresponding to the third special result (third small hit) of the special results. If the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is the third special result, the number of times the variable winning device is opened is M times (3 times) the first number, and the third number (3 times). The special gaming state (second special gaming state) is generated, and the display control means (effect control device 300) determines that the game with the first special result is continuously performed M times based on the determination result of the pre-determination means. In some cases, the replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) can be executed, and in the replacement effect, the third symbol combination mode is displayed once instead of the control of displaying the first symbol combination mode M times. It can be configured to perform control (see FIG. 60 (a)).

With this configuration, not only when the game with the first special result is continuous N times, but also when the game with the first special result is continuous M times, the opening indicated by the symbol combination mode before and after the replacement. Since the display of a plurality of symbol combination modes can be combined into the display of one symbol combination mode without changing the number of times, the interest of the symbol combination mode (small hit symbol) can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the M times is not limited to 3 times, is different from the N times, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a plurality of times. That is, the third number of times is not limited to three times, and is different from the second number of times, and can be appropriately changed if it is a plurality of times.
Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the small hit symbol replacement effect is executed in the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode), but of course, the game states other than the first specific game state ST2. It is also possible to execute the small hit symbol replacement effect.
Further, the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won is not limited to the distribution probability shown in FIG. 55 (a), and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but is provided only in the special figure 2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the small hit is provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Is also good.

Further, the small hit type is not limited to three types, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a plurality of types, and may be, for example, two types.
Specifically, the small hit type may be two types, the first small hit and the second small hit, and in that case (that is, when N = 2 and there is no third special result). In FIG. 60 (a), steps C406 and C410 to C412 are omitted. Further, the small hit type may be two types, the first small hit and the third small hit, and in that case (that is, when N = 3 and there is no third special result), the figure. Steps C407 to C409 of 60 (a) are omitted.

Further, the number of small hit types may be four or more. Specifically, for example, when the special figure variation display game that is the first small hit is consecutively performed twice, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the first small hit symbol is opened twice. Execute a small hit symbol replacement effect to replace with the second small hit symbol indicating that there is (control to display the second small hit symbol once instead of the control to display the first small hit symbol twice). When the special figure variation display game as the first small hit is repeated three times, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the first small hit symbol is opened to the third small number of times. A small hit symbol replacement effect is executed to replace the winning symbol (a control is performed to display the third small hit symbol once instead of the control to display the first small hit symbol three times), and the special feature is the first small hit. When the figure variation display game is played four times in a row, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the first small hit symbol is replaced with a fourth small hit symbol indicating that the number of times of opening is four. The replacement effect is executed (the control to display the 4th small hit symbol once instead of the control to display the 1st small hit symbol 4 times), and the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes the 1st small hit is performed 5 times. In the case of continuous games, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), a small hit symbol replacement effect is executed in which the first small hit symbol is replaced with the fifth small hit symbol indicating that the number of times of opening is five. Instead of the control of displaying the first small hit symbol five times, the control of displaying the fifth small hit symbol once may be performed).
In the example shown in FIG. 62A, the result of the fifth game is out of order, but the result of the fifth game is other than the first small hit (when the result of the fifth game is undecided). That is, the start memory corresponding to the fifth game is not stored).

<Modification example 1 of small hit symbol replacement effect>
It is possible to execute the small hit symbol replacement effect when the special figure variation display game that is the first small hit is continuous, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, if the number of openings indicated by the small hit symbol before replacement and the number of openings indicated by the small hit symbol after replacement are the same, the result of the continuous special figure variation display game is a different small hit type. In addition, it may be possible to execute a small hit symbol replacement effect.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), when the special figure variation display game that is the first small hit and the special figure variation display game that is the second small hit are continuous, the first small A small hit symbol replacement effect is executed in which the hit symbol and the second small hit symbol are replaced with the third small hit symbol (control to display the first small hit symbol once and control to display the second small hit symbol once). Instead of, the control of displaying the third small hit symbol once may be performed).
In the example shown in FIG. 62 (c), the result of the first game (the current special figure variation display game) is the first small hit, and the second game (the next special figure variation display game). The result of is the second small hit, but the opposite may be true. That is, when the result of the first game (the result of the current special figure fluctuation display game) is the second small hit and the second game (the result of the next special figure fluctuation display game) is the first small hit. The small hit symbol replacement effect may be executed in which the second small hit symbol and the first small hit symbol are replaced with the third small hit symbol.

<Modification example 2 of small hit symbol replacement effect>
Also, if the number of openings indicated by the small hit symbol before replacement and the number of openings indicated by the small hit symbol after replacement are the same, if the special figure variation display game that is a small hit is not continuous, the small hit It may be possible to execute the symbol replacement effect.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d), when there is a special figure variation display game that is out of the range between the special figure variation display games that are small hits, there is a small hit symbol difference. You may try to perform a replacement effect. In that case, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a when the fluctuation of the special figure variation display game that is out of alignment is stopped, the game result may be misidentified. As described above, during the execution of the small hit symbol replacement effect, it is preferable to display an image that hides the small hit symbol of the decorative special symbol game display unit 42a when the fluctuation of the special symbol variation display game that is out of alignment is stopped.

FIG. 64 is an example of the display on the display device 41 when the small hit symbol replacement effect shown in FIG. 63 (a) is executed.
When the execution of the small hit symbol replacement effect is set (the second small hit symbol replacement flag is set) and the first special symbol variation display game is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the decorative special symbol game. The display unit 42a and the small symbol variation display unit 42b start variable display of the decorative identification information in a high-speed variable mode. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display unit 42b. On the other hand, the second small hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a.

Next, a special gaming state based on the first small hit (a second special gaming state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), every time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening. The value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (d), the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball number display unit 42e during the ending time of the second special gaming state.

Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (e), the small symbol variation display unit 42b starts high-speed variation display of the decoration identification information, while the decoration special figure game display unit. At 42a, the temporary stop display of the second small hit symbol is started. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is out of alignment, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (f), the outlier symbol (here, "634") is stopped and displayed in the small symbol variation display unit 42b. On the other hand, in the decorative special figure game display unit 42a, the second small hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed, and the cut-in image G1 is displayed in front of the second small hit symbol.

Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (g), the cut-in image G1 disappears, and the small symbol variation display unit 42b starts high-speed variation display of the decoration identification information. On the other hand, in the decorative special figure game display unit 42a, the temporary stop display of the second small hit symbol is started. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (h), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display unit 42b. On the other hand, the second small hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a.
Of course, the image that hides the small hit pattern is not limited to the cut-in image G1 and can be changed as appropriate. Further, instead of displaying an image that hides the small hit symbol, even when the small hit symbol replacement effect is being executed, when the fluctuation of the special figure variation display game that is out of order is stopped, the decorative special symbol game display unit 42a is displayed. It is also possible to stop and display the out-of-order symbol.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the small hit symbol replacement effect of the above embodiment, the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition. A special gaming state (first special gaming state, second special gaming state) in which the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) is opened when the result of the game becomes a special result. ) Is a game machine capable of generating a game, and a pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining the game before the game is executed, and a symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game are displayed as a display device 41. A display control means (effect control device 300) to be displayed on the screen is provided, and in the symbol combination mode, a plurality of types of symbol combination modes (for example, first small hit symbol) indicating different opening times as the opening times of the variable winning device are provided. , 2nd small hit symbol, 3rd small hit symbol), and the display control means determines that the special gaming state (second special gaming state) occurs a plurality of times based on the determination result of the prior determination means. It is possible to execute a replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) in which the symbol combination mode displayed on the display device 41 is replaced. In the replacement effect, the symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game is executed each time the game is executed. Instead of the control for displaying the above, the control for displaying the symbol combination mode indicating the total number of times the variable winning device is opened in a plurality of special game states is configured to be performed.
Therefore, it is possible to combine the display of a plurality of symbol combination modes into one display of the symbol combination mode without changing the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode before and after the replacement. Therefore, the symbol combination mode (small hit symbol). Can enhance the interest of.

<Modification example 3 of small hit symbol replacement effect>
The small hit symbol replacement effect of the embodiment, the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 indicates that the small hit symbol indicating that the number of times of opening is a predetermined number of times is the number of times that the number of times of opening is larger than the predetermined number of times. It is a production that replaces with a small hit pattern, but the opposite is also possible. That is, if the number of times of opening indicated by the small hit symbol before replacement and the number of times of opening indicated by the small hit symbol after replacement are the same, it means that the number of times of opening is a predetermined number as the small hit symbol replacement effect. It may be possible to execute an effect of replacing the small hit symbol shown with a small hit symbol indicating that the number of times of opening is less than the predetermined number of times.

Specifically, for example, instead of (or in addition to) the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process shown in FIG. 60 (a), the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process shown in FIG. 65 (a) may be performed. good.
In the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process shown in FIG. 65 (a), first, a lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect is performed (step C421), and when the lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect is lost (step C422; In N), the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect is won (step C422; Y), it is determined whether the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) is the second small hit symbol (step). C423).

When the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is the second small hit symbol (step C423; Y), that is, when the result of the special symbol variation display game this time is the second small hit, the stop symbol setting process is performed. The stop symbol (second small hit symbol) set in is replaced with the first small hit symbol (step C424), and the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is completed.
On the other hand, if the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is not the second small hit symbol (step C423; N), is the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) the third small hit symbol? Is determined (step C425).

If the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is not the third small hit symbol (step C425; N), the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is the third small hit symbol (step C435; Y), that is, when the result of the special symbol variation display game this time is the third small hit symbol, the stop symbol The stop symbol (third small hit symbol) set in the setting process is replaced with the first small hit symbol (step C426), and the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is completed.

FIGS. 65 (b) to 65 (g) show an example of the display on the display device 41 when the small hit symbol replacement effect of replacing the second small hit symbol with the first small hit symbol is executed.
When the special figure variation display game, which is the second small hit, starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the decorative special figure game display unit 42a and the small symbol variation display unit 42b, the decoration identification information is changed at high speed. The variable display starts. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the second small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the second small hit symbol (“234”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display unit 42b. On the other hand, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a. That is, even in the small hit symbol replacement effect of this modification, only the small hit symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a is replaced, and the small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display unit 42b is not replaced. It has become like.

Next, when a special gaming state based on the second small hit (second special gaming state in which the number of times of opening is two times) occurs and the first openable time starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), it is large. Every time a game ball wins in the winning opening, the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is updated by +15. Then, during the interval time between the first opening and the second opening, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), after the decoration identification information is displayed in high-speed fluctuation on the decoration special figure game display unit 42a, for example. As shown in FIG. 65 (f), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a. Then, when the second openable time starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is updated by +15 every time a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening, and the second open time is started. 2 During the ending time of the special gaming state, the value of the prize ball number display unit 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball number display unit 42e.

That is, in the small hit symbol replacement effect in which the second small hit symbol is replaced with the first small hit symbol, when the fluctuation of the special symbol variation display game in which the result is the second small hit is stopped, the small symbol variation display unit 42b is second. While the small hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a. Then, during the interval time between the first opening and the second opening in the special gaming state based on the second small hit (the second special gaming state in which the number of opening times is two), the decorative special figure game display unit 42a In, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed after the decoration identification information is displayed in high-speed fluctuation.
Further, in the small hit symbol replacement effect in which the third small hit symbol is replaced with the first small hit symbol, when the fluctuation of the special symbol variation display game in which the result is the third small hit is stopped, the small symbol variation display unit 42b is the third. While the small hit symbol (“345”) is stopped and displayed, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a. Then, during the interval time between the first opening and the second opening in the special gaming state based on the third small hit (the second special gaming state in which the number of opening times is three), the second opening and the third opening. During the interval time between the opening of the above, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed after the decoration identification information is displayed in high-speed fluctuation on the decoration special figure game display unit 42a.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modification 3 executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result of the game is a special result. A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state (first special gaming state, second special gaming state) that opens the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) in the event of a failure. Therefore, a display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying the symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game on the display device 41 is provided, and the symbol combination mode includes the first special result (first small) among the special results. The first symbol combination mode (first small hit symbol) corresponding to the hit) and the second symbol combination mode (second small hit symbol) corresponding to the second special result (second small hit) among the special results. , And when the result of the game is the first special result, a special gaming state (second special gaming state) in which the number of times the variable winning device is opened becomes the first number (1 time) occurs, and the game When the result of is the second special result, the special gaming state (second special game) in which the number of times the variable winning device is opened is N times (twice) the first number is the second number (twice). When a state) occurs and the result of the game becomes the second special result, the display control means can execute a replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) in which the symbol combination mode displayed on the display device 41 is replaced. In the replacement effect, the control for displaying the first symbol combination mode N times is performed instead of the control for displaying the second symbol combination mode once (see FIG. 65 (a)). ..

That is, the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode before replacement (the number of times of opening indicated by the display of one second symbol combination mode) and the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode after replacement (multiple times of the first symbol combination mode). It is possible to execute a replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) that controls the display so that the total number of open times indicated by the display is the same. Therefore, since the display of one symbol combination mode can be divided into the display of a plurality of symbol combination modes without changing the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode before and after the replacement, the symbol combination mode (small hit symbol). Can enhance the interest of.
The first number of times is not limited to one time, and may be, for example, a plurality of times.
Further, the N times is not limited to 2 times, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a plurality of times. That is, the second number of times is not limited to two times, and can be changed as appropriate if it is a plurality of times.

Further, in the game machine 10 capable of executing the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modification 3, the symbol combination mode further includes the third symbol corresponding to the third special result (third small hit) among the special results. When there is a combination mode (third small hit symbol) and the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is the third special result, the number of times the variable winning device is opened is M times (three times) the first number. ), Which is the third number of times (three times), a special gaming state (second special gaming state) occurs, and the display control means (effect control device 300) makes a difference when the result of the game is the third special result. The replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) can be executed, and in the replacement effect, the control of displaying the first symbol combination mode M times is performed instead of the control of displaying the third symbol combination mode once. (See FIG. 65 (a)).

With this configuration, not only when the result of the game is the second special result, but also when the result of the game is the third special result, the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode is changed before and after the replacement. Since the display of one symbol combination mode can be divided into the display of a plurality of symbol combination modes, the interest of the symbol combination mode (small hit symbol) can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the M times is not limited to 3 times, is different from the N times, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a plurality of times. That is, the third number of times is not limited to three times, and is different from the second number of times, and can be appropriately changed if it is a plurality of times.
Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 65 (b) to (g), the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 3 is executed in the first specific gaming state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode), but of course, the first It is possible to execute the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modification 3 even in the game state other than the specific game state ST2.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modification 3, the display control means (effect control device 300) corresponds to the probability setting value set by the setting means (game control device 100). It can be configured to select whether or not to execute the replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) with different selection rates.
That is, in the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 3, the winning probability of the lottery of the small hit symbol replacement effect is the current, as in the small hit symbol replacement effect of the above embodiment, the modified example 1 and the modified example 2. It can be configured differently depending on the probability setting value.
With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the probability setting value currently set by the small hit symbol, so that the interest of the symbol combination mode (small hit symbol) can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the small hit symbol replacement effect of the above embodiment, the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 1, the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 2, and the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 3 Can be applied in combination as appropriate.

<Board production device>
FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of the board effect device 44.
For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 includes a movable member 440 and a drive mechanism (not shown) for operating the movable member 440.
The movable member 440 includes a circular rotating body 441, and a part of the rotating body 441 is displayed in the display area of the display device 41 by a drive mechanism (not shown), for example, as shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B. It is possible to move between the overlapping initial position and the operating position where the entire rotating body 441 overlaps the display area of the display device 41. Further, the rotating body 441 of the movable member 440 can be rotated by a drive mechanism (not shown), for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (c).
Further, a part of the plurality of LEDs included in the board decoration device 46 is provided on the movable member 440. That is, the movable member 440 is provided with a light emitting member, and the movable member 440 is decorated (light emitting decoration) by the light emitting member.

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, the position where a part of the rotating body 441 overlaps the upper end of the display area of the display device 41 is the initial position of the movable member 440. The initial position can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 66B, the position where the entire rotating body 441 overlaps the central portion of the display area of the display device 41 is defined as the operating position of the movable member 440. The operating position is not limited and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 66 (c), the rotating body 441 of the movable member 440 is rotating while the movable member 440 is in the operating position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating body 441 rotates. The position of the movable member 440 when performing the operation can be changed as appropriate. That is, the rotating body 441 may perform a rotational operation in a state where the movable member 440 is in a position other than the operating position (for example, an initial position or an intermediate position between the initial position and the operating position). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 66 (c), the rotating body 441 is rotated in the clockwise direction, but the rotating body 441 is not limited to this, and the rotating body 441 is replaced with (or in addition to) the rotating operation in the clockwise direction. ), Rotational operation in the counterclockwise direction may be performed.

<Character production>
The effect control device 300 can execute the effect effect of operating the movable member 440. In the present embodiment, when the effect effect button 25 is operated during the operation valid period in the case where the character effect effect lottery is won, the character effect effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, as a bonus effect, after performing a moving operation of the movable member 440 (an operation of moving from an initial position to an operating position), a rotating operation of the movable member 440 (an operation of rotating the rotating body 441) is performed. Perform the production to be performed.

For example, in step C386 or step C389 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), the effect control device 300 executes an operation promotion effect that displays an image (operation promotion image G2) that prompts the player to operate the effect button 25. A role of determining whether or not to execute the character effect when the operation promotion effect lottery is performed and the operation promotion effect lottery is won (when it is decided to execute the operation promotion effect). Perform a product production lottery. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game, an operation promotion effect lottery or a character effect lottery for the special figure variation display game is executed.

When the operation promotion effect lottery is won, the display setting corresponding to the operation promotion effect is performed in step C394 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), and step C396 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54) is performed. In, the sound number (the number indicating the type of the effect by the speakers 19a and 19b) and the decoration number (the number indicating the type of the effect by the board effect device 44, the board decoration device 46, and the frame decoration device 18) corresponding to the operation promotion effect. The settings are made.
Further, when the character effect effect lottery is won, the display setting corresponding to the character effect effect is performed in step C394 of the variable effect effect setting process (FIG. 54), and step C396 of the variable effect effect setting process (FIG. 54) is performed. In, the sound number (the number indicating the type of the effect by the speakers 19a and 19b) and the decoration number (the number indicating the type of the effect by the board effect device 44, the board decoration device 46, and the frame decoration device 18) corresponding to the accessory effect. The settings are made.

Special figure fluctuation display games where the result is a big hit and special figure fluctuation display games where SP reach occurs are the character production lottery, and other special figure fluctuation display games (special figure fluctuation display where the result is other than the big hit) Special figure variation display game that has a higher probability of winning than the character production lottery targeting games and special figure variation display games that do not generate SP reach, and special figure variation display games that do not generate SP reach The character production lottery for games is a character production lottery for other special figure fluctuation display games (special figure fluctuation display games where the result is a big hit and special figure fluctuation display games where SP reach occurs). It is set so that the probability of losing is higher than that. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it can be suggested that the expectation of the big hit and the expectation of the SP reach are high by executing the character effect.
In addition, there are cases where the character effect is not executed after the operation promotion effect (when the operation promotion effect lottery is won but the character effect lottery is lost), but the operation promotion effect is always executed before the character effect. To. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it can be suggested that the character effect may be executed by executing the operation promotion effect. That is, by executing the operation promotion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the character effect may be executed.

The character production will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an example of a timing chart, and FIG. 68 is an example of light emission decoration and display.
When the special figure variation display game that has won the operation promotion effect lottery and the character effect effect lottery starts, and the operation valid period starts (t101), for example, as shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), the effect control device 300 Outputs a control signal to the display device 41 and displays the operation promotion image G2 on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 68A, for example, the operation promotion image G2 includes a button image G21 imitating the effect button 25, a notification image G22 (for example, a time bar image) for notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period, and an effect. It is an image including a designated image G23 (for example, a character image such as “PUSH!” Or “continuous hitting!”) That specifies an operation mode of the button 25. Further, as shown in FIGS. 67 (a), 67 (b) and 68 (a), for example, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is normally lit in white before the operation effective period starts. It is emitting light at.

When the effect button 25 is operated during the operation valid period (t102), the effect control device 300 outputs a control signal to the board effect device 44 and moves the movable member 440 from the initial position to the operation position. Operation) is executed. As a result, the motor that moves the movable member 440 rotates, and the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the operating position. In this embodiment, since a stepping motor is used as a motor for moving the movable member 440, specifically, when the motor starts to rotate, the non-excitation state (excitation OFF state) is switched to the excitation state (excitation ON state). Occasionally, the movable member 440 moves slightly (the position does not change). That is, as shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), for example, the movable member 440 executes a moving operation after executing a preparatory operation for fine movement at a fixed position.

Therefore, before the movement operation is executed, the preparatory operation for performing the movement operation is always executed, which causes problems such as annoyance and poor appearance of the character effect.
Further, before the execution of the movement operation, it is always deterministically notified that the movement operation is executed by the preparatory operation. That is, before the start of the character effect, it is definitely notified that the character effect will be executed by the preparatory action, so that the expectation that the character effect may be executed is expected at the start of the character effect. There is also a problem that it cannot be sustained until, and the interest in the production of the character is reduced.

In order to alleviate these problems, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation (t102 to t103), the movable member 440 The light emitting member provided is turned off, and the blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41. By turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, the player's line of sight can be attracted to the light emitting portion and deflected from the movable member 440, so that the movable member 440 can be moved. The preparatory movement of member 440 is less likely to be noticed. Further, while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is turned off, and the blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41 to display the blackout image G3 on the movable member 440. The color (the color when the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is in the extinguished state) and the background color of the movable member 440 are similar (colors of the same system), and the movable member 440 is around. Since it fits in well, the preparatory movement of the movable member 440 becomes inconspicuous.

Specifically, when the effect button 25 is operated (t102), the effect control device 300 causes the board effect device 44 to execute the movement operation of the movable member 440 (the operation of moving from the initial position to the operation position). The control signal for displaying the blackout image G3 is output to the panel decoration device 46, the control signal for turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is output, and the control signal for displaying the blackout image G3 is output to the display device 41. Output. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 68B, while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is turned off, and the blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41. Is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 68B, the blackout image G3 is displayed in the entire display area of the display device 41, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the preparatory movement of the movable member 440 becomes inconspicuous, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), in the display area of the display device 41, only the area close to the movable member 440 at the initial position is the blackout image. G3 may be displayed, or as shown in FIG. 68 (d), for example, the movable member 440 at the initial position in the entire display area of the display device 41 (or in the display area of the display device 41). An image with a dark background may be displayed (in an area close to).

Then, when the time required for the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 elapses (t103), the effect control device 300 causes the board decoration device 46 to emit a control signal for causing the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440 to emit light in a specific light emitting mode. Is output, and a control signal for displaying the effect image G4 is output to the display device 41. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (e), while the movable member 440 is performing the moving operation, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 emits light in a specific light emitting mode in which the light emitting member is lit in red, and is displayed. An effect image G4 for emphasizing the movable member 440 is displayed on the device 41.
Next, when the time required for the moving operation of the movable member 440 elapses (t105), that is, when the movable member 440 arrives at the operating position, the effect control device 300 outputs a control signal to the board effect device 44 to output the control signal to the movable member 440. (Operation in which the rotating body 441 rotates) is executed.

After that, when the end timing of the accessory effect is reached (t106), the effect control device 300 outputs a control signal to the board effect device 44 to end the rotation operation of the movable member 440 and the return operation of the movable member 440 (t 106). The operation of moving from the operation position to the initial position) is executed. Further, a control signal is output to the panel decoration device 46 to end the light emission of the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440 in the specific light emitting mode, and a control signal is output to the display device 41 to output the effect image G4. Exit the display.
If the effect button 25 is not operated during the operation valid period, it is not necessary to execute the effect of performing the move operation and the rotation operation (feature effect), and after the operation valid period ends, the move operation and the effect are performed. You may perform the effect (the character effect) to perform the rotation operation.

Here, in the present embodiment, the movement operation and the preparation operation are operations executed at a fixed time value, and the rotation operation is an operation executed at a variable time value. The time until the end of is predetermined. Therefore, the execution time of the rotation operation differs depending on the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated. That is, the time required for the preparatory operation (t102 to t103) does not change according to the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated, and the time required for the move operation (t103 to t105) also changes with the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated. Further, since the time (t101 to t106) from the start of the operation valid period to the end of the accessory effect does not change according to the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated, the effect button 25 does not change accordingly. The farther the operation timing is from the end time point (t104) of the operation valid period, the longer the execution time (t105 to t106) of the rotation operation.

Specifically, for example, the time (t102a to t103a) required for the preparatory operation in FIG. 67 (a) is the same as the time (t102b to t103b) required for the preparatory operation in FIG. 67 (b), and is the same as FIG. 67 (a). The time required for the moving operation (t103a to t105a) in FIG. 67 (b) is the same as the time required for the moving operation (t103b to t105b) in FIG. The time until the end (t101 to t106) is the same as the time (t101 to t106) from the start of the operation valid period to the end of the accessory effect in FIG. 67 (b). Since the operation timing (t102a) in FIG. 67 (a) is farther from the end time point (t104) of the operation valid period than the operation timing (t102b) in FIG. 67 (b), the rotation operation in FIG. 67 (a) is performed. The execution time (t105a to t106) is longer than the execution time (t105b to t106) of the rotation operation in FIG. 67 (b).

In the present embodiment, when the movable member 440 starts the return operation, the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440 is configured to end the light emission in the specific light emitting mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the movable member 440 is performing the return operation, the light emission in the specific light emitting mode is continued, and when the return operation of the movable member 440 is completed (when the movable member 440 arrives at the initial position). It is also possible to configure it to end the light emission in the specific light emission mode.
Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image G4 is terminated when the movable member 440 starts the return operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the movable member 440 is performing the return operation, the effect image G4 is continuously displayed, and when the return operation of the movable member 440 is completed (when the movable member 440 arrives at the initial position), the effect is produced. It is also possible to configure the display of the image G4 to end.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting mode that lights up in white is the normal light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the normal light emitting mode is not limited to this, and the normal light emitting mode can be appropriately changed.
Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is configured to emit light in a normal light emitting mode even before the operation effective period starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is the same before the operation valid period starts and between the start of the operation valid period and the detection of the operation of the effect button 25. It may or may not be different. For example, the light may be turned off before the operation valid period starts, and the light may be emitted after the operation valid period starts.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting mode that lights up in red is defined as the specific light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the specific light emitting mode is not limited to this, and the specific light emitting mode can be appropriately changed.
Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440 is configured to emit light in a specific light emitting mode while performing the moving operation and the rotating operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting mode during the moving operation and the rotating operation may be a normal light emitting mode (that is, the same light emitting mode as the light emitting mode before turning off the light). Further, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 may be the same or different between the movement operation and the rotation operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, a part of the movable member 440 at the initial position overlaps the upper part of the center case 40, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a). Therefore, while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is turned off, and the blackout image G3 (or an image with a dark background) is displayed on the display device 41. In addition, the LED provided on the upper part of the center case 40 (that is, the light emitting member provided around the movable member 440 at the initial position) may be turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the preparatory movement of the movable member 440 less noticeable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the position where a part of the movable member 440 overlaps the display area of the display device 41 is set as the initial position, but the initial position of the movable member 440 is the display area of the entire movable member 440 of the display device 41. It may be a position where it overlaps with the display device 41, or it may be a position where the entire movable member 440 does not overlap with the display area of the display device 41.
Further, for example, when all of the movable members 440 in the initial position do not overlap the display area of the display device 41, the blackout image G3 (or the display device 41) is displayed on the display device 41 while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation. Instead of displaying the image with a dark background), the light emitting member provided around the movable member 440 at the initial position may be turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the preparatory movement of the movable member 440 inconspicuous.

Further, in the present embodiment, the blackout image G3 (or an image having a dark background) is displayed on the display device 41 while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 69, the operation promotion image G2 may be continuously displayed even while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation. With this configuration, the player's line of sight can be attracted to the operation promotion image G2 and deviated from the movable member 440, so that the preparatory movement of the movable member 440 is less likely to be noticed. In the example shown in FIG. 69, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is turned off while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display device 41 is used. The light may be emitted in a light emitting mode in which the color is the same as the background color of the operation promotion image G2 continuously displayed on the screen.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing an effect using the movable member 440 in connection with the game, and the movable member 440 is a predetermined operation (moving operation). The light emitting mode of the movable member 440 (the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440) is the first period (t103 to t103) in which the movable member 440 executes a predetermined operation. t105) and the second period (t102 to t103) immediately before the first period are configured differently (see FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)).

That is, the light emitting mode of the movable member 440 is configured to be different between the first period in which the predetermined operation (movement operation) is performed and the second period in which the preparatory operation for performing the predetermined operation is performed. Therefore, as the light emitting mode in the first period, a light emitting mode (for example, a specific light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode) that makes the movement (moving movement) of the movable member 440 stand out can be selected, or the light emitting mode in the second period. As a result, it is possible to select a light emitting mode (for example, a light emitting mode that turns off the light) so that the operation (preparation operation) of the movable member 440 is not conspicuous. Can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting mode for turning off the light is defined as the light emitting mode in the second period, but the light emitting mode is not limited to this. The light emitting mode in the second period may be, for example, a light emitting mode in which light is emitted with a brightness equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value. By causing the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 to emit light with a brightness equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (for example, maximum brightness), the movable member 440 shines brightly, and the player's line of sight can be deflected from the movable member 440. , The preparatory movement of the movable member 440 is less likely to be noticed, and the interest of the production using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a display device 41, and the movable member 440 can operate in front of the display device 41 (see FIGS. 66A and 66), and the display device 41 is displayed. The embodiment can be configured differently between the first period (t103 to t105) and the second period (t102 to t103) (see FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)).

That is, the display mode of the display device 41 can be configured to be different between the first period in which the predetermined operation (movement operation) is performed and the second period in which the preparatory operation for performing the predetermined operation is performed. With this configuration, as a display mode in the first period, a display mode for conspicuous movement (movement movement) of the movable member 440 (for example, a display for displaying an effect image G4 for emphasizing the movable member 440) is displayed. Aspect) or a display mode in which the movement (preparation movement) of the movable member 440 is not conspicuous (for example, a display mode for displaying the blackout image G3) is selected as the display mode in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the movable member 440.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing an effect using the movable member 440 in connection with the game, and the movable member 440 can execute a predetermined operation (moving operation). The light emitting mode of the movable member is a first period (t103 to t105) in which the movable member 440 executes a predetermined operation and a second period (t102 to t103) immediately before the first period. ), And the color of the movable member 440 and the display color of the display device 41 in the second period can be configured to be the same color (FIGS. 68 (b) and (c)). , (D)).
With such a configuration, since the movable member 440 fits into the surroundings, the preparatory movement of the movable member 440 becomes inconspicuous, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the movable member 440.

As described above, the light emitting mode in the second period is not limited to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off, and can be appropriately changed. That is, the color of the movable member 440 in the second period can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the present embodiment, the blackout image G3 (or an image with a dark background) is displayed on the display device 41 during the second period (the period during which the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation). Not limited. That is, the display color of the display device 41 in the second period is not limited to black (or dark color), and can be appropriately changed according to the color of the movable member 440 in the second period. For example, when the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440 is made to emit white light with a brightness equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (for example, maximum brightness) in the second period, the display color of the display device 41 in the second period is white (for example). Alternatively, the color is bright), so that the movable member 440 fits into the surroundings, so that the preparatory movement of the movable member 440 becomes inconspicuous, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the movable member 440.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing an effect using the movable member 440 in connection with the game, and the movable member 440 is a predetermined operation (moving operation and rotating operation). The light emitting mode of the movable member 440 (the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440) is the first period (t103 to t103) in which the movable member 440 executes a predetermined operation. It can be configured differently between t106) and the second period (t106 ~) immediately after the first period.
Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the movable member 440 starts the return operation (t106), the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440 is configured to end the light emission in the specific light emitting mode. ..

Therefore, the light emitting mode of the movable member 440 can be configured to be different between the first period in which the predetermined operation (movement operation and rotation operation) is performed and the second period in which the return operation is performed. With this configuration, as the light emitting mode in the first period, a light emitting mode (for example, a specific light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode) that makes the movement (moving movement and rotation movement) of the movable member 440 stand out is selected. Or, as a light emitting mode in the second period, a light emitting mode (for example, a light emitting mode different from the specific light emitting mode (for example, a normal light emitting mode) or a light emitting mode) that does not make the operation (returning operation) of the movable member 440 stand out. Since it is possible to select the light emitting mode)), it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the movable member 440.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing an effect using the movable member 440 in connection with the game, and the movable member 440 can execute a predetermined operation (moving operation). The light emitting mode of the movable member 440 (the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440) is the first period (t103 to t105) in which the movable member 440 executes a predetermined operation. The color of the movable member 440 and the color of the light emitting member provided around the movable member 440 in the second period are different from those of the second period (t102 to t103) immediately before the first period. It can be configured to have the same color system.
Specifically, in the present embodiment, in addition to turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, the LED provided on the upper part of the center case 40 is provided. (That is, the light emitting member provided around the movable member 440 in the initial position) can be configured to be turned off.
With such a configuration, since the movable member 440 fits into the surroundings, the preparatory movement of the movable member 440 becomes inconspicuous, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the movable member 440.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing an effect using the movable member 440 in connection with the game, and is an operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player. The movable member 440 is provided with a display device 41 for displaying an operation promotion image G2 for prompting the operation of the operating means, and the movable member 440 is predetermined when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period during which the operation of the operating means is effective. The display device 41 can be configured to execute the operation (movement operation) and continue to display the operation promotion image G2 until the movable member 440 starts a predetermined operation even after the operation means is operated. (See FIG. 69).

That is, the display of the operation promotion image G2 can be continued until the preparatory operation for performing the predetermined operation (movement operation) is completed. With this configuration, the player's line of sight can be attracted to the operation promotion image G2 and deviated from the movable member 440, so that the preparatory movement of the movable member 440 is less likely to be noticed, and the movable member 440 is used. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that was there.
The operating means is not limited to the effect button 25, and may be, for example, a touch panel 29.

Further, the image displayed on the display device 41 in order to divert the player's line of sight from the movable member 440 is not limited to the operation promotion image G2 and can be appropriately changed.
Further, while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, the movable member 440 is prepared in place of (or in addition to) displaying an image for deflecting the player's line of sight from the movable member 440 on the display device 41. During the operation period, a light emitting member other than the light emitting member provided around the movable member 440 in the initial position (for example, an LED arranged in a region far from the movable member 440 in the initial position) is made to emit light. It may be configured as. With this configuration, the player's line of sight can be attracted to the light emitting portion and deviated from the movable member 440, so that the preparatory movement of the movable member 440 is less likely to be noticed, and the effect using the movable member 440 is reduced. Can enhance the interest of.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing an operation effect using the movable member 440 in connection with the game, and the movable member 440 is an operation effect (movement operation and rotation operation). The advance notice operation (preparatory operation) is performed immediately before the advance notice operation), and the execution time of the advance notice operation is constant and the movement of the movable member 440 during the advance notice operation is constant regardless of the effect mode of the operation effect. (See FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)).
Specifically, in the present embodiment, the advance notice operation (preparatory operation) is a rattling operation (operation that makes a slight movement at a fixed position) that occurs with the start of excitation of the stepping motor. Regardless of the length of the advance notice operation, the execution time (t102 to t103) of the advance notice operation is constant, and the movement of the movable member 440 during the advance notice operation is constant.

Therefore, the effect mode of the concealment effect (for example, the effect of turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, the effect of displaying the blackout image G3 on the display device 41, etc.) for concealing the advance notice operation (preparatory operation) is provided. Since it is not necessary to change the motion effect according to the effect mode, it is possible to reduce the processing load when performing the effect using the movable member 440.
That is, when the execution time of the advance notice operation differs depending on the effect mode of the motion effect, or when the movement of the movable member 440 during the advance notice operation differs depending on the effect mode of the motion effect, the concealment effect is performed according to the effect mode of the motion effect. Since it is necessary to execute the process of selecting the effect mode (effect time, effect range, etc.), the processing load increases accordingly. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, regardless of the effect mode of the motion effect, the execution time of the advance notice operation and the movement of the movable member 440 during the advance notice operation are constant, so that the process of selecting the effect mode of the concealment effect is performed. No need to run.

In this embodiment, the execution time of the advance notice operation and the movement of the movable member 440 during the advance notice operation are set to be constant regardless of the effect time of the operation effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the effect mode of the motion effect is not limited to the effect time of the motion effect, and may be, for example, the type of motion performed in the motion effect. Specifically, for example, when it is feasible to perform a moving motion and a rotating motion as an motion effect and a moving motion (not a rotating motion), the motion effect is performed. Regardless of the type of operation to be performed, the execution time of the advance notice operation and the movement of the movable member 440 during the advance notice operation are constant.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect time (t103 to t106) of the operation effect can be configured to be changeable (see FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)).
With this configuration, the movable member 440 can be used because it is possible to end the motion effect at a predetermined end timing regardless of the start timing of the motion effect (for example, the operation timing of the effect button 25). It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that was there.

In the present embodiment, the effect time of the operation effect is changed in order to end the operation effect at a predetermined end timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to configure so that the longer the effect time of the motion effect is, the higher the expectation of the big hit of the motion effect is. As a result, it is possible to suggest predetermined information (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) depending on the effect time of the operation effect, so that the effect of the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.
Further, by making it possible to change the effect time of the motion effect, it is possible to widen the range of the motion effect, so that the interest of the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced. Furthermore, by making it possible to change the effect time of the motion effect, the effect time of another effect (for example, display effect) executed together with the operation effect can be changed, so that the range of the other effect can be expanded. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to enhance not only the motion effect but also the interest of other effects performed together with the motion effect.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with an effect means other than the movable member 440, and the effect time (t103 to t106) of the operation effect can be changed according to the effect mode of the effect using the effect means. (See FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b)).
Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect time (t103 to t106) of the operation effect is the effect mode (effect time) of the effect (operation promotion effect) using the display device 41 and the effect button 25, that is, the effect button 25. It can be changed according to the operation timing of.
With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect related to another effect (an effect using an effect means other than the movable member 440) as an operation effect, so that the effect using the movable member 440 can be executed. It can enhance the interest.

In this embodiment, the execution time of the rotation operation is changed in the production time of the operation effect (the effect of moving and rotating the character) according to the operation timing of the effect button 25. , Not limited to this. For example, the execution time of the movement operation may be changed according to the operation timing of the effect button 25, or both the execution time of the movement operation and the execution time of the rotation operation may be changed according to the operation timing of the effect button 25. You may let it.
Further, in the present embodiment, the operation effect is executed after the operation promotion effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the operation effect to be executed without executing the operation promotion effect. .. That is, the motion effect may be executed in relation to another effect, or may be executed without being related to the other effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect time of the operation effect is changed according to the operation timing of the effect button 25, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect other than the operation effect (other than the effect performed before the operation effect). The effect time of the motion effect may be changed according to the type of the effect (the effect of the motion, the other effect performed during the motion effect, and the other effect performed after the motion effect). Specifically, for example, the motion effect may be performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the reach occurs, and the effect time of the motion effect may be longer as the jackpot expectation of the reach effect is higher. Furthermore, in addition to the normal pattern in which the operation effect with a longer effect time is selected as the jackpot expectation of the reach effect is higher, when the reach effect is the reach effect (N reach) with the lowest jackpot expectation, the effect time is the longest. A contradiction pattern (extreme heat pattern) in which a long motion effect is selected may be provided.

Further, the motion effect is not limited to the effect of performing a moving motion (a motion in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the motion position) and a rotation motion (a motion in which the rotating body 441 rotates). The motion effect may be, for example, an effect of performing a moving operation (no rotation operation is performed), an effect of performing a rotation operation (no movement operation is performed), and other than the movement operation and the rotation operation. It may be a production that performs the operation of.
Further, the operation (predetermined operation) executed immediately after the preparation operation (preliminary operation) is not limited to the operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the operation position. That is, the operation executed immediately after the preparation operation may be an operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to another position (for example, an operation position), or may be an operation in which the rotating body 441 rotates. It may be good, or it may be any other operation.

<Transformation example 1 of character production>
The effect control device 300 operates the movable member 440 from an initial position (for example, a position shown in FIG. 66 (a)) to an operating position (for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (a)) as a function effect for operating the movable member 440. The first accessory effect that moves to the position shown in FIG. 66 (b) and the second accessory effect that the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position (the position between the initial position and the operation position). It may be feasible. The intermediate position may be a position where the entire movable member 440 overlaps the display area of the display device 41, or a part of the movable member 440 may overlap the display area of the display device 41.
In this modification, step C386 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54) (lottery of the notice appearing during the first half variation) and step C389 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54) (lottery of the notice appearing during the second half variation). ) Will be used for the character production lottery. Then, if the character effect lottery in step C386 is won, the character effect is executed during the first half change, and if the character effect lottery is won in step C389, the character effect is produced during the second half change. To execute.

Specifically, the effect control device 300 performs a character effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the character effect in step C386 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), and wins the character effect lottery. In the case (when it is decided to execute the character effect during the first half change), refer to the effect mode distribution table and set the character effect to be executed during the first half change as the first character effect. 2 A production mode selection lottery is performed to determine whether or not to produce a character.
Further, when the effect control device 300 performs a character effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the character effect in step C389 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), and wins the character effect lottery (second half). When it is decided to execute the character effect during the fluctuation), refer to the effect mode distribution table and set the character effect to be executed during the latter half fluctuation to the first character effect or the second character effect. A production mode selection lottery is performed to determine whether or not to produce.

Then, when the first accessory effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery, the display setting corresponding to the first accessory effect is performed in step C394 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), and the variable effect is performed. In step C396 of the setting process (FIG. 54), the sound number (the number indicating the type of the effect by the speakers 19a and 19b) and the decoration number (the board effect device 44, the board decoration device 46, and the frame decoration) corresponding to the first accessory effect. A number indicating the type of effect by the device 18) is set.
Further, when the second accessory effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery, the display setting corresponding to the second accessory effect is performed in step C394 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), and the variable effect is performed. In step C396 of the setting process (FIG. 54), the sound number (the number indicating the type of the effect by the speakers 19a and 19b) and the decoration number (the board effect device 44, the board decoration device 46, and the frame decoration) corresponding to the second accessory effect. A number indicating the type of effect by the device 18) is set.

FIG. 70B shows an example of an effect mode distribution table to be referred to when performing an effect mode selection lottery.
For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the ratio of executing the first character effect during the first half fluctuation (the first character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery in step C386) regardless of the result of the special figure variation display game. The probability of being selected) is lower than the ratio of executing the second character effect during the first half fluctuation (the probability that the second character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery in step C386). Therefore, in this modification, when the movable member 440 moves during the first half fluctuation, the case where the movable member 440 does not move to the operating position is better than the case where the movable member 440 moves to the operating position. many.

In addition, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is off (other than a big hit), the character effect is not executed during the latter half fluctuation. That is, when the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the probability of winning the character production lottery in step C389 is set to other than 0% (0% <winning probability <100%), but the special figure change. If the display game is off (other than a big hit), the probability of winning the C389 character production lottery is set to 0%. Therefore, in this modification, the bonus effect is executed only when the result is a big hit during the latter half fluctuation, and therefore, the movable member 440 moves during the latter half fluctuation to suggest that the big hit is confirmed. Can be done.

Further, the ratio of executing the first character effect during the latter half change (probability that the first character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery in step C389) is the ratio of executing the second character effect during the latter half change. It is higher than (probability that the second accessory effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery in step C389), and in the case of this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the second during the latter half change. The ratio of executing one character effect (probability that the first character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery in step C389) is set to 100%. That is, the character effect that appears during the latter half change is only the first character effect, and the second character effect is not executed during the latter half change. Therefore, in this modification, when the movable member 440 moves during the latter half fluctuation, the movable member 440 always moves to the operating position.

The movable member 440 can perform a first movement operation of moving from the initial position to the intermediate position and a second movement operation of moving from the intermediate position to the operation position. In the first character effect, the movable member 440 performs all movement operations (first movement operation and second movement operation). Therefore, if the character effect that appears during the first half fluctuation is only the first character effect, , The player will grasp how the movable member 440 moves in the first half of the fluctuation. Therefore, the interest in the movable member 440 cannot be sustained until the latter half of the fluctuation, and the interest in the latter half of the fluctuation is reduced. On the other hand, by configuring the character production to be executed only during the latter half fluctuation without executing the character production during the first half fluctuation, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the latter half of the fluctuation. Since the movable member 440 does not move during the first half fluctuation, the interest in the first half of the fluctuation is reduced.

Therefore, in this modification, during the first half fluctuation, the movable member 440 performs only a part of the moving motion, rather than the ratio of the movable member 440 performing the first accessory effect of performing all the moving motions. It was configured so that the ratio of executing the object production was higher. With this configuration, it is less likely that the player will grasp how the movable member 440 moves in the first half of the fluctuation, so that it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the second half of the fluctuation, and it is also movable during the first half of the fluctuation. Since the member 440 may move, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the first half of the fluctuation.

Since it is sufficient that the ratio of executing the second character effect during the first half fluctuation is higher than the ratio of executing the first character effect, the first character effect is not executed during the first half fluctuation (during the first half fluctuation). It is also possible to configure the appearing character production to be only the second character production), and even if it is configured in that way, both the decline in the interest in the first half of the fluctuation and the decline in the interest in the second half of the fluctuation can be achieved. It can be suppressed. However, by making it possible to execute not only the second character effect but also the first character effect during the first half fluctuation, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the movable member 440 may move to the operating position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the first half of the fluctuation. Therefore, in this modification, not only the second character effect but also the first character effect can be executed during the first half fluctuation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), in the first accessory effect, the movable member 440 performs the first movement operation of moving from the initial position to the intermediate position, and then does not stop at the intermediate position but is in the intermediate position. The second movement operation of moving from the operation position to the operation position is performed, and the operation is stopped at the operation position for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 5 seconds). Then, when the first accessory effect is completed (that is, after stopping at the operating position for a predetermined time), the movable member 440 returns to the initial position. Therefore, in the first accessory production, the staying time at the intermediate position is "0.1 seconds" in the example shown in FIG. 70 (c) because it only passes through the intermediate position and does not stop at the intermediate position. ..
Further, in the second accessory effect, the movable member 440 performs the first movement operation of moving from the initial position to the intermediate position, and stops at the intermediate position for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). Then, when the second accessory effect is completed (that is, after stopping at a predetermined position in the middle position), the movable member 440 returns to the initial position.

In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the time during which the movable member 440 stops at the operating position in the first accessory effect executed during the first half fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as “first half operating position staying time”) is set. Although it is set to 3 seconds, the time spent in the first half operating position is not limited to 3 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the first accessory effect executed during the latter half fluctuation, the time for the movable member 440 to stop at the operating position (hereinafter referred to as "second half operating position staying time") is set to 5 seconds, but the latter half operating position staying time is set. Is not limited to 5 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the second character production, the time for the movable member 440 to stop at the intermediate position (hereinafter referred to as "first half intermediate position stay time") is set to 3 seconds, but the first half intermediate position stay time is limited to 3 seconds. However, it can be changed as appropriate.

During the first half fluctuation, more game information is displayed on the display device 41 than during the second half fluctuation. Therefore, by shortening the first half operation position staying time (that is, the time when the movable member 440 overlaps with the central portion of the display area of the display device 41 during the first half fluctuation), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the game information. , In this modification, the staying time in the first half operation position is shortened.
Further, the second half operation position stay time may be the same as the first half operation position stay time. However, in this modification, the character effect that appears during the latter half fluctuation (the first character effect that is executed during the latter half change) is executed at the time of the big hit notification in the hit notification effect, so the latter half operation position stay time is used. Then, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which the movable member 440 and the display device 41 are associated with each other) is often executed. Therefore, by lengthening the second half operation position stay time, the effect of the predetermined effect can be enhanced. Therefore, in this modification, the second half operation position stay time is longer than the first half operation position stay time. ..
That is, in this modification, by making the first half operation position stay time shorter than the second half operation position stay time, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the game information in the first half of the fluctuation and to produce a predetermined effect in the second half of the fluctuation. It is compatible with the improvement of.

The time required to move from the initial position to the intermediate position may be the same or different between the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation.
Further, the time required for moving from the initial position to the intermediate position may be the same or different between the first accessory effect and the second accessory effect.
Further, the time required for moving from the intermediate position to the operating position may be the same or different between the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation.

In addition, since it is sufficient that the ratio of executing the first character effect during the latter half fluctuation is higher than the ratio of executing the second character effect, not only the first character effect but also the second character effect is performed during the latter half fluctuation. May be configured to be feasible. In such a configuration, the time for the movable member 440 to stop at the intermediate position (hereinafter referred to as “second half intermediate position stay time”) in the second accessory effect executed during the latter half fluctuation can be appropriately selected. For example, by making the second half halfway position staying time longer than the first half halfway position staying time, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the game information in the first half of the fluctuation and to perform a predetermined effect in the second half of the fluctuation (for example, the movable member 440 and the display device). It is possible to achieve both improvement of the production effect of (production related to 41).

Further, in this modification, during the period during which the accessory effect is being executed, the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440 is made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is conspicuous, and the accessory effect is completed. During the period when the movable member 440 returns to the initial position, the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440 is configured to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 does not stand out.
As an example of a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is conspicuous, there is a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 blinks at a predetermined brightness (for example, maximum brightness).

Further, as an example of a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is inconspicuous, there is a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is lit with a brightness lower than the brightness in the light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is conspicuous (including a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is turned off). ..
Further, as an example of a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is inconspicuous, there is a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is lit in the same color as the display color on the display device 41. In this modification, since the bonus effect that appears during the latter half fluctuation is executed at the time of the big hit notification in the hit notification effect, the movable member 440 returns to the initial position after the bonus effect is finished. During the period, a rainbow-colored background image is often displayed on the display device 41. When a rainbow-colored background image is displayed on the display device 41 during the period when the movable member 440 is performing the return operation, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is turned on in rainbow colors. In this way, the color of the movable member 440 during the return operation (the emission color of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) is set to a color similar to the background color of the movable member 440 (similar color). Since the movable member 440 fits in the surroundings, the return operation of the movable member 440 becomes inconspicuous.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70 (b), the probability that the first accessory effect during the first half fluctuation is selected is the same depending on whether the jackpot is a big hit or not, but the probability is not limited to this. For example, the probability that the first accessory effect during the first half fluctuation is selected may be higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a miss, and in the case of a big hit, it may be higher than in the case of a miss. May be low. Further, in the case of a big hit, the probability that the first accessory effect during the first half fluctuation is selected may be 0%. In the case of an outlier, the probability that the first accessory effect during the first half fluctuation is selected may be 0%.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70 (b), the probability that the second accessory effect during the first half fluctuation is selected is the same depending on whether the jackpot is a big hit or not, but the probability is not limited to this. For example, the probability that the second character effect during the first half fluctuation is selected may be higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a miss, and in the case of a big hit, it may be higher than in the case of a miss. May be low. However, in the case of a big hit, it is preferable that the probability that the second bonus effect during the first half fluctuation is selected is higher than the probability that the first bonus effect during the first half fluctuation is selected. Further, in the case of an outlier, it is preferable that the probability that the second accessory effect during the first half variation is selected is higher than the probability that the first accessory effect during the first half variation is selected.
Further, the second character effect may be executed during the latter half fluctuation, and in that case, the probability that the second character effect during the latter half change is selected is the same depending on whether the jackpot is a big hit or not. The case of a big hit may be higher than the case of a miss, and the case of a big hit may be lower than the case of a miss.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the bonus effect of the modification 1 is a gaming machine capable of executing the effect using the movable member 440 in connection with the game, and the movable member 440 is The first effect (first accessory effect) of performing the first operation (first movement operation) and the second operation (second movement operation), and the second operation in which the movable member 440 performs the first operation and does not perform the second operation. It is possible to execute two effects (second character effect), and in the first timing (during the first half fluctuation), the ratio of executing the first effect is lower than the ratio of executing the second effect, and the first timing. At the second timing (during the latter half fluctuation), which is different from the above, the ratio of executing the first effect is configured to be higher than the ratio of executing the second effect (see FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b)). ..

Therefore, since it is unlikely that the player will grasp how the movable member 440 moves at the first timing (during the first half fluctuation), it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the second timing (during the second half fluctuation). Further, since the movable member 440 may move not only at the second timing but also at the first timing, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the first timing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the movable member 440.
Further, in addition to the first effect (first accessory effect) that performs both of the first operation and the second operation, the second effect (second accessory effect) that performs only one operation is also executed. Since it is possible, the operation frequency of the movable member 440 at the first timing can be increased. Therefore, since it becomes easy to notice a defect (failure or the like) of the movable member 440, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as the effect of not performing the effect using the movable member 440.

In this modified example, not only the second character effect but also the first character effect can be executed during the first half fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the condition that the ratio of executing the first effect (first character effect) is lower than the ratio of executing the second effect (second character effect) in the first timing (during the first half fluctuation) is satisfied, for example. , The first character effect may not be executed during the first half change (the character effect appearing during the first half change is only the second character effect).
Further, in this modification, the second character effect is not executed during the latter half change (the character effect appearing during the second half change is limited to the first character effect), but the present invention is not limited to this. If the condition that the ratio of executing the first effect (first character effect) is higher than the ratio of executing the second effect (second character effect) in the second timing (during the latter half change) is satisfied, for example. , It may be configured so that not only the first character effect but also the second character effect can be executed during the latter half fluctuation.
Further, in this modification, in the special figure fluctuation display game that does not become a big hit, it is configured not to execute the character effect during the latter half fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, not only when the result is a big hit. Even if the result is other than a big hit, it may be possible to execute the character production during the latter half fluctuation.

Further, the first operation is not limited to the operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position. That is, the first operation may be an operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to another position (for example, an intermediate position), or the movable member 440 moves from the intermediate position to another position (for example, an operation position). It may be an operation of rotating, it may be an operation of rotating the rotating body 441, or it may be an operation other than that.
Further, the second operation is not limited to the second movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the intermediate position to the operation position. That is, the second operation may be an operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to another position (for example, an intermediate position), or the movable member 440 moves from the intermediate position to another position (for example, an operation position). It may be an operation of rotating, a rotating operation of rotating the rotating body 441, or any other operation.
Further, the first timing is not limited to the first half fluctuation. Further, the second timing is not limited to the latter half fluctuation. For example, the first timing may be set before the development to SP reach during the latter half fluctuation, and the second timing may be set after the development to SP reach during the latter half fluctuation.

Further, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the bonus effect of the first modification is a gaming machine capable of performing an motion effect (feature effect) using the movable member 440 in connection with the game, and is movable. The member 440 executes a first operation (first movement operation) to move to the first specific position (intermediate position) and a second operation (second movement operation) to move to the second specific position (operation position). It is possible, and the time for the movable member 440 to stay in the first specific position is the second timing (during the second half fluctuation), which is different from the first timing, in the operation effect executed at the first timing (during the first half fluctuation). The time for the movable member 440 to stay in the second specific position is longer than the motion effect executed in the first timing, and the motion effect executed at the second timing is longer than the motion effect executed at the first timing. (See FIG. 70 (c)).

Specifically, in this modification, the time for the movable member 440 to stay in the middle position is set to 3 seconds in the second accessory effect executed during the first half fluctuation, and is executed during the second half fluctuation. Since it is set to 0.1 seconds in the first character effect, the motion effect executed during the first half fluctuation is longer.
Further, since the movable member 440 does not move to the operating position in the second accessory effect, the time for the movable member 440 to stay in the operating position in the second accessory effect is 0 seconds. Therefore, the time for the movable member 440 to stay in the operating position is set to 0 seconds in the second accessory effect executed during the first half fluctuation, and 5 seconds in the first accessory effect executed during the second half fluctuation. Because it is set to, the motion effect executed during the latter half fluctuation is longer.
Further, the time for the movable member 440 to stay in the operating position is set to 3 seconds in the first accessory effect executed during the first half fluctuation, and 5 seconds in the first accessory effect executed during the second half fluctuation. Because it is set to, the motion effect executed during the latter half fluctuation is longer.

With this configuration, it is possible to reverse the time during which the movable member 440 stays at a specific position between the first timing and the second timing. As a result, the movement of the movable member 440 does not become monotonous, and it is possible to execute the motion effect with inflection within one variation, so that the effect of the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.
Further, in the first timing (during the first half fluctuation), more game information is displayed on the display device 41 than in the second timing (during the second half fluctuation). Therefore, especially when the second specific position (operating position) overlaps with the central portion of the display area of the display device 41 as in this modification, the time for the movable member 440 to stay in the second specific position is set. By configuring the motion effect executed at the first timing to be shorter than the motion effect executed at the second timing, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the game information.

In this modification, the time for the movable member 440 to stay in the middle position is the same for the first accessory effect executed during the first half fluctuation and the first accessory effect executed during the second half fluctuation. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the time for the movable member 440 to stay in the middle position (first specific position) is during the second half change (second timing) in the first accessory effect executed during the first half change (first timing). It may be configured to be longer than the first character effect to be executed.
Further, the first specific position is not limited to the intermediate position, and may be, for example, an operating position. Further, the second specific position is not limited to the operating position, and may be, for example, an intermediate position.
Further, the first timing is not limited to the first half fluctuation. Further, the second timing is not limited to the latter half fluctuation. For example, the first timing may be set before the development to SP reach during the latter half fluctuation, and the second timing may be set after the development to SP reach during the latter half fluctuation.

Further, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the accessory effect of the first modification is a gaming machine capable of executing an effect using the movable member 440 in connection with the game, and is provided with a display device 41 and is movable. The member 440 can move from the first position (initial position) to the second position (intermediate position, operating position) and can emit light, and the period during which the movable member 440 moves from the second position to the first position. The emission color of the movable member 440 (the emission color of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) and the display color of the display device 41 in (the period during which the return operation is performed) are the same color. Can be configured as follows.
With such a configuration, the operation of moving the movable member 440 from the second position to the first position (returning operation) becomes inconspicuous, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the movable member 440.

Further, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the bonus effect of the first modification has the effect time of the first effect (first character effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the second timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation). For example, it can be configured so as to be different from the effect time of the first effect executed (during the latter half fluctuation) (see FIG. 70 (c)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an motion effect (feature effect) with inflection within one variation, so that the interest of the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.
In the example shown in FIG. 70 (c), the effect time of the first effect (first accessory effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half change) is set at the second timing (for example, during the second half change). It is shorter than the production time of the first production (first character production) to be executed, but the opposite may be true. In addition, the production time of the first effect (first role effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the first effect (first role) executed at the second timing (for example, during the second half change). It may be the same as the production time of the object production).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70 (c), the first effect (for example, during the first half change) and the second effect (for example, during the second half change) are executed at the first timing (during the first half change). The production time is different by providing a difference in the staying time at the operating position between the first production (first character production), but the production time is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), a first effect (for example, during the first half change) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half change) and a second effect (for example, during the second half change) executed at the second timing (during the second half change). The effect time may be different by providing a difference in the number of times of execution of the first movement operation between the effect (first effect effect) and the effect.

That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the movable member 440 performs a first moving operation (moving from an initial position to an intermediate position) and a second moving operation (moving from an intermediate position to an operating position). In the first accessory effect, a fanning effect may be performed in which the first movement operation is executed a plurality of times.
In the example shown in FIG. 70 (d), in the first character effect effect executed during the first half fluctuation, the fanning effect is performed, but in the first character effect effect executed during the second half fluctuation, the fanning effect is performed. Instead, the first movement operation is performed only once. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest in the latter half of the fluctuation by making the movement of the movable member 440 different between the first bonus effect during the first half fluctuation and the first bonus effect during the second half fluctuation. Will be.

The time required to move from the initial position to the middle position may be the same or different between the first half fluctuation (with fanning effect) and the second half fluctuation (without fanning effect).
Further, the time required for moving from the initial position to the intermediate position may be the same or different between the first accessory effect and the second accessory effect.
Further, the time required for moving from the intermediate position to the operation position may be the same or different between the first half fluctuation (with fanning effect) and the second half fluctuation (without fanning effect).

From the above, in the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the bonus effect of the first modification, the first effect (first bonus effect) is the first operation (for example, the first) of the movable member 440 once or a plurality of times. It is an effect of performing a second operation (for example, a second movement operation) after performing a movement operation), and the number of times of the first operation is the first effect executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the second effect. It can be configured differently from the first effect executed at the timing (for example, during the latter half fluctuation) (see FIG. 70 (d)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible not only to execute the motion effect (feature effect) with inflection within one fluctuation, but also to change the movement of the movable member 440 in the first timing (for example, the first half variation). It is possible to make the first effect (first character effect) executed in the middle) different from the first effect (first character effect) executed in the second timing (for example, during the latter half fluctuation). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the movable member 440.

In the example shown in FIG. 70 (d), the number of executions of the first operation (for example, the first movement operation) is set in the first effect (first accessory effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation). Although it is twice, the number of executions of the first operation in the first effect executed at the first timing is not limited to two times, and may be one time or two or more times. good.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70 (d), the number of executions of the first operation (for example, the first movement operation) is set in the first effect (first accessory effect) executed at the second timing (for example, during the latter half fluctuation). Although it is once, the number of executions of the first operation in the first effect executed at the second timing is not limited to one, and may be a plurality of times.
Further, the first operation is performed at one of the first timing and the second timing (the number of executions of the first operation is set to one or more), and the first operation is performed at the other of the first timing and the second timing. By not performing the operation (setting the number of executions of the first operation to 0), by providing a difference in the number of executions of the first operation, the first operation is executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation). The production time of one production (first character production) may be different from the production time of the first production (first character production) executed at the second timing (for example, during the latter half fluctuation).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70 (d), the effect time of the first effect (first accessory effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half change) is set at the second timing (for example, during the second half change). It is longer than the production time of the first production (first character production) to be executed, but the opposite may be true. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 70 (d), the number of executions of the first operation (for example, the first movement operation) is the second timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) rather than the first effect executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation). For example, the number of first effects performed in (during the latter half of the fluctuation) is less, but the opposite may be true. In addition, the production time of the first effect (first role effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the first effect (first role) executed at the second timing (for example, during the second half change). It may be the same as the production time of the object production).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70 (d), the time for the movable member 440 to stay in the operating position is the same for the first accessory effect during the first half fluctuation and the first accessory effect during the second half variation. However, it is not limited to this. That is, the time during which the movable member 440 stays in the operating position is executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the second timing (for example, during the latter half fluctuation). It may be different from the first production (first character production) to be performed. For example, in one of the first timing and the second timing, the time for the movable member 440 to stay in the operating position is set to 0 seconds, so that the time for the movable member 440 to stay in the operating position is set to the first timing (for example, the first half variation). It is also possible to make the first effect (first character effect) executed in (middle) different from the first effect (first character effect) executed in the second timing (for example, during the latter half fluctuation). ..

Further, the accessory effect of the first modification can be appropriately combined with the accessory effect of the above embodiment.
Specifically, for example, in the bonus effect of the first modification as in the bonus effect of the above embodiment, the preparatory operation for moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to another position (that is, the stepping motor). A concealment effect (for example, an effect of turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, or a blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41) that conceals the rattling motion (movement that slightly moves at a fixed position) that occurs with the start of excitation. You may execute (directing, etc.).

<Transformation example 2 of character production>
As the first accessory effect in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the operation position via the intermediate position, the effect control device 300 is an effect that the movable member 440 does not stop at the intermediate position, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a). It is possible to execute not only the first accessory effect of the aspect (hereinafter referred to as "intermediate passage mode") but also the first accessory effect of the effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "intermediate stop mode") in which the movable member 440 is temporarily stopped at the intermediate position. It may be.
In this modification, the character effect may be executed during the first half fluctuation, may be executed during the second half fluctuation, or may be executed during the first half fluctuation to the second half fluctuation. It may be.

When the character effect is an effect that can be executed during the first half variation, for example, in step C386 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54), a character effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the character effect is performed. If you win the character production lottery (when it is decided to execute the character production), refer to the production mode distribution table and pass the character production to be executed as the first character in the middle passage mode. An effect mode selection lottery is performed to determine whether to use the effect, the first accessory effect of the halfway stop mode, or the second accessory effect.
Further, when the character effect is an effect that can be executed during the latter half variation, for example, in step C389 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54), the character effect lottery and the effect mode selection lottery are performed.
Further, when the character effect is an effect that can be executed from the first half fluctuation to the second half change, for example, in step C386 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54), the character effect lottery and the effect mode selection lottery. I do.
In this modification, the probability that the intermediate passage mode is selected in the effect mode selection lottery (total selection rate of the intermediate passage mode) is the probability that the intermediate stop mode is selected in the effect mode selection lottery (total of the intermediate stop modes). It is higher than, but not limited to, the total selection rate of the halfway stop mode may be lower than the total selection rate of the halfway stop mode, and is the same as the total selection rate of the halfway stop mode. May be.

FIG. 71 (b) shows an example of the effect mode distribution table to be referred to when performing the effect mode selection lottery.
For example, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the result of the special figure variation display game is off (other than a big hit), the ratio of executing the first accessory effect of the intermediate passage mode (in the middle of the effect mode selection lottery). The ratio of executing the first character effect of the halfway stop mode (probability that the first character effect of the halfway stop mode is selected in the effect mode selection lottery) rather than the probability that the first character effect of the passage mode is selected). ) Is lower, and if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the ratio of executing the first character effect of the intermediate passage mode (the first character effect of the intermediate passage mode is selected by the effect mode selection lottery). The ratio of executing the first accessory effect of the halfway stop mode (probability of selecting the first accessory effect of the halfway stop mode in the effect mode selection lottery) is higher than the selection probability). Therefore, in this modification, it is suggested that by executing the first accessory effect in the halfway stop mode, the expectation of the big hit is higher than in the case of executing the first accessory effect in the halfway passage mode. can.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the ratio of executing the second character effect (the second character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery). Probability of being done) is 0%. Therefore, in this modification, the second character effect is executed only when the result is out of order (other than the big hit). Therefore, by executing the first character effect, the second character effect is executed. It can be suggested that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the case of executing.
That is, in this modification, the expected value (big hit expectation) from which the special result mode is derived is in the order of the second character effect <the first character effect of the intermediate passage mode <the first character effect of the intermediate stop mode. It is getting higher.

For example, when the expectation of a big hit increases in the order of the second character effect <the first character effect in the halfway stop mode <the first character effect in the halfway passage mode, or the first character effect in the halfway stop mode <the first 2 When the value increases in the order of the character effect <the first character effect of the intermediate passage mode, the player's expectation is lowered when the movable member 440 stops at the intermediate position. In addition, when the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of the first character production in the midway passage mode <second character production <first character production in the halfway stop mode, or the first character production in the halfway passage mode <midway. When the order of the first accessory effect of the stop mode <the second accessory effect increases, the player's expectation decreases when the movable member 440 passes the intermediate position (when the movable member 440 does not stop at the intermediate position). Resulting in.

On the other hand, when the jackpot expectation increases in the order of the second accessory effect <the first accessory effect in the intermediate passage mode <the first accessory effect in the intermediate stop mode, the movable member 440 stops at the intermediate position. At that point, whether the character effect being executed is the character effect with the highest expectation of a big hit (the first character effect of the halfway stop mode), or the character effect with the lowest expectation of a big hit (the second character). Since it is unclear whether it is an effect), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation that the movable member 440 stops at an intermediate position. Further, in this case, the first accessory effect in the midway passage mode is not the accessory effect with the lowest jackpot expectation, but the jackpot expectation is medium, so that the movable member 440 passes through the midway position. It is also possible to suppress a decrease in expectations for.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the character effect of the modification 2 can generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result. A first effect (first character effect) in which the movable member 440 moves to the operating position, and a second effect (second character effect) that is partially common to the first effect. The first effect mode (intermediate passage mode) in which the movable member 440 operates to the operation position without stopping at a specific position (intermediate position) and the movable member 440 are the effectable modes of the first effect. There is a second effect mode (intermediate stop mode) in which the movable member 440 stops at a specific position and does not move to the operation position in the second effect. When the result is not a special result (big hit), the ratio of executing the first effect is lower than the ratio of executing the second effect, and when the result of the game is a special result, the first effect mode is the first. The ratio of executing the effect is configured to be higher than the ratio of executing the first effect in the first effect mode (see FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b)).

Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation that the movable member 440 stops at a specific position (intermediate position) and a decrease in the expectation that the movable member 440 passes through the specific position (intermediate position). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the movable member 440.
In the example shown in FIG. 71 (b), the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, is configured not to execute the second character effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the condition that the jackpot expectation increases in the order of the second bonus effect <the first bonus effect in the halfway passage mode <the first bonus effect in the halfway stop mode, only when the result is other than the jackpot Even if the result is a big hit, the second character production may be feasible.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 71 (b), the probability that the first accessory effect of the halfway stop mode is selected in the case of a big hit and the probability that the second accessory effect is selected in the case of an outlier are determined. They are the same, but they may be different. In the case of a big hit, the probability that the first accessory effect of the halfway stop mode is selected may be 0% or 100%. Further, the probability that the second accessory effect is selected in the case of an outlier may be 0% or 100%.

In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the time for the movable member 440 to stop at the operating position is set to 5 seconds in the first accessory effect of the intermediate passage mode, but the time is 5 seconds. It is not limited to seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the operation position in the first accessory effect of the intermediate passage mode may be the same as or different from the operation position in the first accessory effect of the intermediate stop mode. Further, the operation position in the first accessory effect of the intermediate passage mode may be the same as the intermediate position in the first accessory effect of the intermediate stop mode, or the same as the intermediate position in the second accessory effect. Is also good.

Further, although the time for the movable member 440 to stop at the operating position is set to 5 seconds in the first accessory effect of the intermediate stop mode, the time is not limited to 5 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the operation position in the first accessory effect of the intermediate stop mode may be the same as or different from the operation position in the first accessory effect of the intermediate passage mode. Further, the operation position in the first accessory effect of the intermediate stop mode may be the same as the intermediate position in the first accessory effect of the intermediate passage mode, or the same as the intermediate position in the second accessory effect. Is also good.

Further, although the time for the movable member 440 to stop at the intermediate position is set to 3 seconds in the second accessory effect, the time is not limited to 3 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the intermediate position in the second accessory effect may be the same as or different from the intermediate position in the first accessory effect of the intermediate passage mode. Further, the intermediate position in the second accessory effect may be the same as or different from the operation position in the first accessory effect in the intermediate passage mode.
Further, the intermediate position in the second accessory effect may be the same as or different from the intermediate position in the first accessory effect in the intermediate stop mode. Further, the intermediate position in the second accessory effect may be the same as or different from the operation position in the first accessory effect in the halfway stop mode.

Further, the time required for moving from the initial position to the intermediate position may be the same or different depending on the intermediate passage mode and the intermediate stop mode.
Further, the time required for moving from the initial position to the intermediate position may be the same or different between the first accessory effect and the second accessory effect.
Further, the time required for moving from the intermediate position to the operation position may be the same or different depending on the intermediate passage mode and the intermediate stop mode.

Further, the accessory effect of the modification 2 can be appropriately combined with the accessory effect of the above-described embodiment and the accessory effect of the modification 1.
Specifically, for example, in the bonus effect of the second modification as in the bonus effect of the above embodiment, the preparatory operation for moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to another position (that is, the stepping motor). A concealment effect (for example, an effect of turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, or a blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41) that conceals the rattling motion (movement that slightly moves at a fixed position) that occurs with the start of excitation. You may execute (directing, etc.).
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), in the bonus effect of the second modification as well as the bonus effect of the first modification, the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the second timing different from the first timing. It may be possible to execute at both of the two timings (for example, during the latter half of the fluctuation), and the selection rate of each effect mode of the accessory effect may be different between the first timing and the second timing.

<Transformation example 3 of character production>
In the effect control device 300, as a bonus effect for operating the movable member 440, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), the movable member 440 passes through an intermediate position from an initial position (for example, a position shown in FIG. 66 (a)). The first accessory effect that moves to the operation position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 66 (b); hereinafter referred to as the "first operation position") and the second accessory effect that the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position. In addition, it is possible to execute a third accessory effect in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the second operation position (for example, a position farther from the initial position than the first operation position) via the intermediate position and the first operation position. May be there.

In this modification, the first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position is an operation suggesting that the degree of expectation that reach will occur is high, and is executed during the first half fluctuation.
Further, the second movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the intermediate position to the first operation position is an operation suggesting that the degree of expectation for developing SP reach is high, and is executed during the latter half fluctuation.
Further, the third movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the intermediate position to the second operation position is also an operation suggesting that the degree of expectation for developing SP reach is high, and is executed during the latter half fluctuation.

Specifically, for example, in step C386 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), the effect control device 300 performs a character effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the character effect, and wins the character effect lottery. If this is the case (when it is decided to execute the character effect), refer to the effect mode distribution table and decide whether to perform the character effect as the first character effect or the second character effect. A production mode selection lottery is performed to determine whether or not to use the third character production.
The special figure production lottery for the special figure variable display game where reach occurs has a higher probability of winning than the character production lottery for the special figure variable display game where reach does not occur, and the special figure where reach does not occur. The character effect lottery for the variable display game is set so that the probability of losing is higher than the character effect lottery for the special figure variable display game in which reach occurs. Therefore, in this modification, it can be suggested that the expectation that reach will occur is high by executing the accessory effect (moving the movable member 440).

FIG. 72 (b) shows an example of the effect mode distribution table to be referred to when performing the effect mode selection lottery.
For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), when reach does not occur in the special figure variation display game, the ratio of executing the second character effect (probability that the second character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery). ) Is set to 100%. That is, when the reach does not occur, the first accessory effect and the third accessory effect are not executed (even if the movable member 440 moves, it does not move to the first operation position or the second operation position). There is. As described above, since the second movement operation and the third movement operation are operations suggesting that the expectation for developing SP reach is high, there is no possibility of developing SP reach (when reach does not occur). In), the first accessory effect that performs the second movement operation and the third accessory effect that performs the third movement operation are not executed.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the higher the expectation of the big hit of the generated reach, the lower the ratio of the second character effect being executed, but the higher the expectation of the big hit of the generated reach. The higher the ratio of the first character production and the third character production being executed. Therefore, in this modification, by executing the first accessory effect and the third accessory effect (moving member 440 exceeds the intermediate position), there is a possibility that the SP reach with a higher expectation of a big hit will be developed. It can be suggested that it is high.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), when the SP reach (SP3 reach) having the highest expectation of a big hit occurs, the ratio of executing the third character effect (the third character in the effect mode selection lottery). The ratio of executing the first character effect (probability of selecting the first character effect in the effect mode selection lottery) and the ratio of executing the second character effect (effect mode selection) It is higher than the probability that the second character production is selected in the lottery). Therefore, in this modification, by executing the third character effect, there is a possibility that the SP reach with the highest expectation of big hit will be developed as compared with the case of executing the first character effect and the second character effect. Can be suggested to be high.

In the example shown in FIG. 72 (b), the higher the expectation of a big hit of the reach that occurs, the higher the ratio of the first character effect and the third character effect being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. ..
That is, the probability that all the reach will select the first accessory effect in the effect mode selection lottery when the reach occurs> the effect mode selection lottery when a reach with a lower jackpot expectation than the reach occurs. The condition that the first character effect is selected, the probability that the first character effect will be selected in the effect mode selection lottery when the reach occurs <when a reach with a higher expectation of big hit than the reach occurs Although the condition of the probability that the first accessory effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery is satisfied, there may be a reach that does not satisfy these conditions among the plurality of reach. Specifically, for example, the selection rate of the first character effect may be configured to be 15% for N reach, 20% for SP1 reach, 15% for SP2 reach, and 30% for SP3 reach.
With this configuration, even if the SP reach has a low expectation of a big hit, it is possible to entertain the player with the SP reach by executing an impactful effect by the movable member 440, which reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

In addition, for all reach, the probability that the third character effect will be selected in the effect mode selection lottery when the reach occurs> In the effect mode selection lottery when a reach with a lower jackpot expectation than the reach occurs. The condition that the third character effect is selected, the probability that the third character effect will be selected in the effect mode selection lottery when the reach occurs <when a reach with a higher expectation of big hit than the reach occurs Although the condition of the probability that the third character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery is satisfied, there may be a reach that does not satisfy these conditions among the plurality of reach. Specifically, for example, the selection rate of the third character effect may be configured to be 5% for N reach, 20% for SP1 reach, 10% for SP2 reach, and 40% for SP3 reach.
With this configuration, even if the SP reach has a low expectation of a big hit, it is possible to entertain the player with the SP reach by executing an impactful effect by the movable member 440, which reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, the third character effect may be a big hit confirmation effect that suggests that the result will be a big hit. That is, the third character effect may be executed only when the result is a big hit.
Alternatively, different information may be suggested depending on the light emitting mode of the movable member 440 (light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) during the execution of the third accessory effect. Specifically, for example, there is a high possibility that SP reach will be developed by changing the light emitting mode of the movable member 440 to the first light emitting mode (for example, yellow) when the movable member 440 arrives at the second operating position. It is suggested that the second emission mode (for example, red) develops into SP reach, and the third emission mode (for example, rainbow color) suggests that the result is a big hit. You can do it.

Further, the accessory effect of the modification 3 can be appropriately combined with the accessory effect of the embodiment, the accessory effect of the modification 1, and the accessory effect of the modification 2.
Specifically, for example, in the bonus effect of the third modification as in the bonus effect of the above embodiment, the preparatory operation for moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to another position (that is, the stepping motor). A concealment effect (for example, an effect of turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, or a blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41) that conceals the rattling motion (movement that slightly moves at a fixed position) that occurs with the start of excitation. You may execute (directing, etc.).

Further, for example, in the character effect of the modified example 1 and the character effect of the modified example 2, the selection rate of each effect mode of the character effect differs depending on the type of reach generated, as in the case of the character effect of the modified example 3. You may let it.
Further, in the same as the bonus effect of the modified example 1, in the bonus effect of the modified example 3, both the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the second timing different from the first timing (for example, during the second half fluctuation) In addition to making it feasible, the selection rate of each effect mode of the character effect may be different between the first timing and the second timing.
Further, the accessory effect of the above embodiment and the accessory effect of the modifications 1 to 3 may be an effect of operating a movable means other than the movable member 440. As a movable means other than the movable member 440, for example, one end side is supported by a rotation shaft and the other end side does not overlap the initial position (for example, the display area of the display device 41) by rotating around the rotation shaft. A movable means for moving from a position) to an operating position (for example, a position overlapping the display area of the display device 41) can be mentioned.

Further, in the character production of the above-described embodiment and the character production of the modifications 1 to 3, the time of staying at the initial position, the time of staying at the intermediate position, the staying time of staying at the operating position, and the time from the initial position to the intermediate position. The time required for movement, the time required for movement from the intermediate position to the operation position, and the like can be appropriately changed within a range of 0 seconds or more. Further, the time to stay in the initial position, the time to stay in the middle position, and the time to stay in the operating position may all be the same, all may be different, or only a part may be different. good. Further, the time required for moving from the initial position to the intermediate position and the time required for moving from the intermediate position to the operating position may be the same or different.
Further, in the character effect of the above-described embodiment and the character effect of the modified examples 1 to 3, the selection rate of each effect mode of the character effect is in the range of 0% to 100% (including 0% and 100%, respectively). ) Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the selection rates of each effect mode of the character effect may be the same, all may be different, or only a part may be different.

<Light emission effect>
The effect control device 300 can execute a light emitting effect of switching the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the first reach effect (for example, N reach), a light emitting effect suggesting the expectation of a big hit and the expectation of developing into another reach effect is executed, and the second reach effect (for example, SP reach) is executed. ) Is executed, a light emitting effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, as a light emitting effect, an effect of switching the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 from the normal light emitting mode to the specific light emitting mode is executed.

For example, in step C389 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), the effect control device 300 performs a first light emission effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the light emission effect during the execution of the first reach effect.
The first light emission effect lottery for the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit has a higher probability of winning than the first light emission effect lottery for the special figure variation display game in which the result is other than the big hit. The first light emission effect lottery for special figure fluctuation display games other than big hits has a higher probability of losing than the first light emission effect lottery for special figure change display games where the result is a big hit. It is set. Furthermore, the first light emission effect lottery for the special figure variation display game in which SP reach occurs has a higher probability of winning than the first light emission effect lottery for the special figure variation display game in which SP reach does not occur. The first light emission effect lottery for the special figure variation display game where SP reach does not occur has a higher probability of losing than the first light emission effect lottery for the special figure variation display game where SP reach occurs. It is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by executing the light emitting effect during the execution of the first reach effect, two types of information (information that the expectation of the big hit is high and information that the expectation of developing into SP reach is high are high. ) Can be suggested.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a second light emission effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the light emission effect during the execution of the second reach effect, for example, in step C389 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54).
The second light emission effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit has a higher probability of winning than the second light emission effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game in which the result is other than the big hit. The second light emission effect lottery for special figure fluctuation display games other than the big hit has a higher probability of losing than the second light emission effect lottery for the special figure change display game where the result is a big hit. It is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, one type of information (information that the expectation of a big hit is high) can be suggested by executing the light emission effect during the execution of the second reach effect.

An example of the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. 73.
For example, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), when the special figure variation display game that has won the first light emission effect lottery and the second light emission effect lottery starts, and for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), a reach occurs. For example, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), at the start of the first reach effect, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 changes from a normal light emitting mode that lights up in white to a specific light emitting mode that lights up in red. Switch. This makes it possible to suggest two types of information (information that the expectation of a big hit is high and information that the expectation of developing SP reach is high). In the example shown in FIG. 73, as the first reach effect, an effect of whether or not the development symbol stops is performed. When the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is switched to the specific light emitting mode, an image of the display mode corresponding to the specific light emitting mode (for example, a red serif image G5) is displayed on the display device 41. May be.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (d), the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 returns to the normal light emitting mode. The timing at which the light emitting mode returns from the specific light emitting mode to the normal light emitting mode can be appropriately selected, and for example, even during the first reach effect (that is, before the result of whether or not the development symbol stops is known). It may be good, or it may be at the end of the first reach effect (that is, after the result of whether or not the development symbol stops is known). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the development symbol is stopped, but of course, even if the light emission effect is performed during the execution of the first reach effect, the development symbol does not stop (that is, it does not develop into SP reach). )In some cases.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (e), when the second reach effect is started, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 starts from the normal light emitting mode in which the light emitting member lights up in white. It switches to a light emitting mode suggesting the type of. For example, when the started second reach effect (SP reach) is SP1 reach, it switches from white to blue, when it is SP2 reach, it switches from white to yellow, and when it is SP3 reach, it switches from white to green. Switch to. The effect suggesting the type of the started second reach effect (the effect in which the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is switched to the light emitting mode suggesting the type of the started second reach effect) is, for example,. In the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the effect is performed, and the lottery is executed when the lottery is won.
After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (f), the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 returns to the normal light emitting mode. In the example shown in FIG. 73, as the second reach effect, a battle effect in which the ally character fights against the enemy character is performed.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (g), during the second reach effect, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 changes from the normal light emitting mode of lighting in white to the specific light emitting mode of lighting in red. Switch to the mode. This makes it possible to suggest one type of information (information that the expectation of a big hit is high). When the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is switched to the specific light emitting mode, an image of the display mode corresponding to the specific light emitting mode (for example, a red serif image G5) is displayed on the display device 41. May be. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 73 (f), the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 may be a specific light emitting mode in which the light emitting member lights up in red. In that case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 may be switched from the light emitting mode suggesting the type of the started second reach effect to the specific light emitting mode without returning to the normal light emitting mode. It is possible to return to the normal light emitting mode from the light emitting mode suggesting the type of the started second reach effect, and immediately after that, switch to the specific light emitting mode.

Further, by switching to the specific light emitting mode at the time shown in FIG. 73 (f), specific information different from the information that the expectation of the big hit is high (for example, information that the ally character attacks first) is suggested. Is also good. Further, in that case, the specific information is suggested by switching to the specific light emitting mode, and after returning to the normal light emitting mode once, the character image "It is preemptive !!!" is displayed on the display device 41. It is also possible to switch to the light emission mode to suggest information that the expectation of a big hit is high. Alternatively, the specific light emitting mode is switched to suggest specific information, the specific light emitting mode is maintained as it is, and the character image "It is preemptive !!!" is displayed on the display device 41. May suggest information that the expectation of a big hit is high.

Then, when it is confirmed that the result of the special figure variation display game being executed in the second reach effect is a big hit (when the ally character wins), the determination is made, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (h). At that time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is switched from the specific light emitting mode that lights up in red to the jackpot notification mode that lights up in rainbow colors. This can suggest that the result will be a big hit.
Further, when it is determined that the result of the special figure variation display game being executed in the second reach effect is not a big hit (when the ally character loses), the movable member 440 is provided at the time of the determination. The light emitting mode of the light emitting member returns from the specific light emitting mode of lighting in red to the normal light emitting mode of lighting in white. This can suggest that the result is not a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting mode that lights up in white is the normal light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the normal light emitting mode is not limited to this, and the normal light emitting mode can be appropriately changed. The normal light emitting mode may be, for example, a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off.
Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting mode that lights up in red is defined as the specific light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the specific light emitting mode is not limited to this, and the specific light emitting mode can be appropriately changed. The specific light emitting mode may be, for example, a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off.
Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting mode that lights up in rainbow colors is defined as the jackpot notification mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot notification mode can be appropriately changed. The jackpot notification mode may be, for example, a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing an effect using an effect means (light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) in connection with the game. It is possible to execute a specific effect (light emission effect) by means, and the specific effect executed at the first timing (during the execution of the first reach effect) is expected to be a big hit with the first information (the result of the special figure variation display game). Degree) and second information (expectation to develop into other reach effects) can be suggested, and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during the execution of the second reach effect) different from the first timing is the first. It is configured so that information can be suggested but second information cannot be suggested (see FIG. 73).
Therefore, since the information suggested by the specific effect differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (light emitting member provided on the movable member 440), the interest of the effect using the effect means can be enhanced. ..

The first information is not limited to the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a big hit, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the second information is not limited to the degree of expectation that develops into other reach effects, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the first reach production is not limited to N reach. The first reach effect may be, for example, a weak SP reach with a low degree of expectation, or an SP reach first half effect that appears in the first half of the SP reach.
Further, the second reach production is not limited to the SP reach. The second reach effect may be, for example, a strong SP reach with a high degree of expectation, or an SP reach second half effect that appears in the latter half of the SP reach.

Further, the specific effect using the effect means (light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) may be an effect in which the effect means blinks in a predetermined color (for example, red). That is, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and information that the expectation of developing SP reach is high) are suggested by the effect means blinking in red during the execution of the first reach effect. At the same time, one type of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high) may be suggested by blinking the effect means in red during the execution of the second reach effect.
Further, when the specific effect using the effect means (light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) is an effect of blinking in a predetermined color (for example, red), for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the first The blinking cycle may be different between the execution of the 1st reach effect and the execution of the 2nd reach effect.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means is a light emitting means (light emitting member provided in the movable member 440), and the specific effect is an effect in which the light emitting means blinks, and the light emitting means emits light. The color is the same for the specific effect executed at the first timing (during the execution of the first reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during the execution of the second reach effect), and the light emission thereof. The blinking cycle of the means can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing (see FIG. 74 (a)).
With this configuration, not only the information suggested by the specific effect differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (light emitting member provided in the movable member 440), but also the blinking cycle also changes depending on the timing. Because they are different, the player can easily recognize that the suggested information is different due to the difference in the blinking cycle.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), the blinking cycle during the execution of the first reach effect is longer than the blinking cycle during the execution of the second reach effect, but vice versa. good.
Further, the blinking cycle during the execution of the first reach effect can be appropriately changed within a range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, the blinking cycle during the execution of the second reach effect can be appropriately changed within a range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, instead of making the blinking cycle different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing, for example, the number of blinks (including 0 times) may be different. , The cumulative time for emitting light at a predetermined brightness (for example, maximum brightness) (predetermined luminance emission cumulative time, including 0 seconds) may be different, or the cumulative time for emitting light at a predetermined color (for example, red) (predetermined color emission cumulative time). The time (including 0 seconds) may be different.
In the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), the cumulative red emission time during the execution of the first reach effect is longer than the cumulative red emission time during the execution of the second reach effect, but vice versa. May be.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), at the start of the second reach effect, an effect suggesting the type of the started second reach effect (for example, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440 starts). The effect of switching to the light emitting mode suggesting the type of the second reach effect) is not executed, but it may be executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (a), the movable member 440 is provided at the time when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed in the second reach effect is confirmed (when the result of the battle effect is won or lost). When the light emitting mode of the light emitting member has returned to the normal light emitting mode (for example, the light emitting mode that lights up in white), but it is determined that the result of the special figure variation display game being executed in the second reach effect is a big hit (for example). When the ally character wins), the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 may be switched to the jackpot notification mode (for example, the light emitting mode that lights up in rainbow color) at the time of the determination.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing a specific effect using an effect means (light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) in connection with the game, and the specific effect is , The effect means repeats a predetermined mode (lighting and extinguishing), and the predetermined mode is a specific effect executed at the first timing (during execution of the first reach effect) and a second timing different from the first timing. It is the same as the specific effect executed in (during the execution of the second reach effect), and the repetition cycle of the predetermined mode is the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing. , Can be configured differently (see FIG. 74 (a)).
With this configuration, the repetition cycle differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (light emitting member provided on the movable member 440), so that the interest of the effect using the effect means can be enhanced. ..
The effect of repeating a predetermined mode is not limited to the effect of alternately repeating lighting and extinguishing (blinking effect), for example, lighting in the first color (for example, white) and lighting in the second color (for example, red). And may be repeated alternately.
Further, the effect means is not limited to the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, and may be a light emitting means other than the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440.

Further, the effect means is not limited to the light emitting means, and may be, for example, a movable member 440. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect in which the movable member 440 performs a predetermined operation (for example, a first movement operation). That is, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and SP reach) are obtained by performing the first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position during the execution of the first reach effect. While suggesting information that the degree of expectation for development is high), one type of information (for example, a big hit) is performed by performing the first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position during the execution of the second reach effect. Information that the degree of expectation is high) may be suggested.

Further, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect in which the movable member 440 repeats a predetermined operation (for example, a first movement operation). That is, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and SP) by performing the first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position a plurality of times during the execution of the first reach effect. Information that there is a high expectation that it will develop into reach), and one type of information by performing the first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position multiple times during the execution of the second reach effect. (For example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high) may be suggested.
Further, when the specific effect using the effect means is an effect in which the movable member 440 repeats a predetermined operation (for example, the first movement operation), the execution of the first reach effect is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (b). The repetition cycle may be different between the inside and the execution of the second reach effect.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means is a movable means (movable member 440), and the specific effect is an effect in which the movable means repeats a predetermined operation (for example, a first movement operation). Is the same for the specific effect executed at the first timing (during the execution of the first reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during the execution of the second reach effect), and the predetermined operation is the same. The repetition period of the above can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing (see FIG. 74 (b)).
With this configuration, not only the information suggested by the specific effect differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (movable member 440), but also the repetition cycle differs depending on the timing, so that the player can use the player. , It becomes possible to easily recognize that the suggested information is different due to the difference in the repetition cycle.

The predetermined operation is not limited to the first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position. That is, the predetermined operation may be an operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to another position (for example, an intermediate position or an operation position), or an operation in which the rotating body 441 rotates. The operation may be other than.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (b), the repetition cycle during the execution of the first reach effect is longer than the repetition cycle during the execution of the second reach effect, but vice versa. good.
Further, the repetition cycle during the execution of the first reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, the repetition cycle during the execution of the second reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, instead of making the repetition cycle different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing, for example, the number of repetitions (including 0 times) may be different. , The cumulative time for the movable member 440 to stay at a predetermined position (for example, an intermediate position) (cumulative time for staying at a predetermined position, including 0 seconds) may be different. In the example shown in FIG. 74 (b), the cumulative time for staying in the middle position during the execution of the first reach effect is longer than the cumulative time for staying in the middle position during the execution of the second reach effect, but vice versa. It may be.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing a specific effect using the effect means (movable member 440) in connection with the game, and the effect means is a predetermined mode for the specific effect. (For example, it is an effect of repeating the first movement operation), and the predetermined mode is a specific effect executed at the first timing (during execution of the first reach effect) and a second timing (second reach) different from the first timing. It is the same as the specific effect executed in (during the execution of the effect), and the repetition cycle of the predetermined mode is different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing. (See FIG. 74 (b)).
With such a configuration, since the repetition cycle differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (movable member 440), it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the effect means.
The predetermined mode is not limited to the first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position. That is, the predetermined embodiment may be an operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to another position (for example, an intermediate position or an operation position), or an operation in which the rotating body 441 rotates, or an operation thereof. The operation may be other than.
Further, the effect means is not limited to the movable member 440, and may be a movable means other than the movable member 440.

Further, the effect means is not limited to the light emitting means and the movable means, and may be, for example, a display device 41. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a serif image G5 of a ally character) on the display device 41. For example, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), the dialogue image G5 of the ally character (for example, the character image "Stop the development symbol!" And the balloon image surrounding it) is displayed during the execution of the first reach effect. .. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (g), the dialogue image G5 of the ally character (for example, the character image "First strike !!!" and the balloon image surrounding it) is displayed even during the execution of the second reach effect. Will be done. That is, by displaying the dialogue image G5 of the ally character on the display device 41 during the execution of the first reach effect, two types of information (for example, the information that the expectation of the big hit is high and the expectation of developing into SP reach are obtained. It suggests one kind of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high) by displaying the dialogue image G5 of the ally character on the display device 41 during the execution of the second reach effect. You may try to do it.
Further, when the specific effect using the effect means is an effect of displaying the dialogue image G5 of the ally character on the display device 41, for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), the first reach effect is being executed. , The cumulative time for displaying the dialogue image G5 of the ally character on the display device 41 (the cumulative time for displaying the dialogue image) may be different depending on whether the second reach effect is being executed.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means is a display means (display device 41), and the specific effect is an effect of displaying a serif image G5 of a predetermined character (ally character) on the display means. The character is the same in the specific effect executed at the first timing (during the execution of the first reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during the execution of the second reach effect), and the dialogue image. The cumulative display time (cumulative time for displaying dialogue images) obtained by accumulating the time for displaying G5 may be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing. Yes (see FIG. 74 (c)).
With this configuration, not only the information suggested by the specific effect differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (display device 41), but also the cumulative display time (cumulative time for displaying dialogue images) depends on the timing. ) Is also different, so that the player can easily recognize that the suggested information is different due to the difference in the cumulative display time.

The predetermined character is not limited to the ally character, and may be an enemy character, or may be both a ally character and an enemy character.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (c), the cumulative display time during the execution of the first reach effect is shorter than the cumulative display time during the execution of the second reach effect, but vice versa. May be.
Further, the cumulative display time during the execution of the first reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, the cumulative display time during the execution of the second reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, instead of making the cumulative time for displaying the serif image different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing, for example, the number of times the dialogue image G5 is displayed (the number of appearances is 0). (Including) may be different, or when the serif image G5 is displayed periodically, the period (including 0 seconds) may be different.

Further, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of displaying an image other than the serif image G5 on the display device 41. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of displaying the character image G6 of a predetermined character (for example, a ally character) on the display device 41. That is, by displaying the character image G6 of the ally character on the display device 41 during the execution of the first reach effect, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and the expectation of developing SP reach are obtained. It suggests one kind of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high) by displaying the character image G6 of the ally character on the display device 41 during the execution of the second reach effect. You may try to do it.
Further, when the specific effect using the effect means is an effect of displaying the character image G6 on the display device 41, the display device 41 is in the process of executing the first reach effect and the execution of the second reach effect. The cumulative time for displaying the character image G6 (cumulative time for displaying the character image, including 0 seconds) may be different, or the number of times the character image G6 is displayed (number of appearances, including 0 times) may be different. However, when the character image G6 is displayed periodically, the period (including 0 seconds) may be different.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect using a display means (display device 41) in connection with the game, and the specific effect is the first display means. It is an effect of displaying an image (character image G6 of a ally character) and a second image (line image G5 of a ally character), and the first image is executed at the first timing (during execution of the first reach effect). The specific effect and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during the execution of the second reach effect) different from the first timing are the same, and the cumulative display time (line) obtained by accumulating the time for displaying the second image. The image display cumulative time) can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing (see FIG. 74 (c)).
With this configuration, the cumulative display time (cumulative time for displaying serif images) differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the display means (display device 41), so that the effect of the effect using the display means is enhanced. Can be done.

The first image is not limited to the character image G6 of the ally character, and may be, for example, the character image G6 of the enemy character, the character image G6 of the ally character and the enemy character, or the dialogue. It may be the image G5.
Further, the second image is not limited to the dialogue image G5 of the ally character, and may be, for example, the dialogue image G5 of the enemy character, the dialogue image G5 of the ally character and the enemy character, or the character. It may be the image G6.
Further, the effect means is not limited to the display device 41, and may be a display means other than the display device 41.

Further, the effect means is not limited to the light emitting means, the movable means, and the display means, and may be, for example, speakers 19a and 19b. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of outputting a predetermined effect sound (for example, a dialogue sound of a ally character) from the speakers 19a and 19b. For example, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), the dialogue image G5 of the ally character (for example, the character image "Stop the development symbol!" And the balloon image surrounding it) is displayed during the execution of the first reach effect. However, at that time, the dialogue sound of the ally character (for example, the sound "Stop the development symbol!") May be output from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (g), the dialogue image G5 of the ally character (for example, the character image "First strike !!!" and the balloon image surrounding it) is displayed even during the execution of the second reach effect. However, at that time, the dialogue sound of the ally character (for example, the sound of "preemptive !!!!") may be output from the speakers 19a and 19b. That is, by outputting the dialogue sound of the ally character from the speakers 19a and 19b during the execution of the first reach effect, two types of information (for example, the information that the expectation of the big hit is high and the expectation of developing into SP reach are obtained. It suggests one kind of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high) by displaying the dialogue sound of the ally character from the speakers 19a and 19b during the execution of the second reach effect. You may try to do it.
Further, when the specific effect using the effect means is an effect of outputting the dialogue sound of the ally character from the speakers 19a and 19b, for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (d), the first reach effect is being executed. , The cumulative time for outputting the dialogue sound of the ally character from the speakers 19a and 19b (cumulative dialogue sound output time) may be different between the execution of the second reach effect.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means is the sound output means (speakers 19a, 19b), and the specific effect is an effect of outputting the dialogue sound of a predetermined character (ally character) from the sound output means. , The predetermined character is the same in the specific effect executed at the first timing (during the execution of the first reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during the execution of the second reach effect). The cumulative output time (cumulative time for outputting the dialogue sound), which is the cumulative time for outputting the dialogue sound, shall be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing. (See FIG. 74 (d)).
With this configuration, not only the information suggested by the specific effect differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (speakers 19a, 19b), but also the cumulative output time (cumulative dialogue sound output) depends on the timing. Since the time) is also different, the player can easily recognize that the suggested information is different due to the difference in the cumulative output time.

The predetermined character is not limited to the ally character, and may be an enemy character, or may be both a ally character and an enemy character.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (d), the cumulative output time during the execution of the first reach effect is shorter than the cumulative output time during the execution of the second reach effect, but vice versa. May be.
Further, the cumulative output time during the execution of the first reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, the cumulative output time during the execution of the second reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, instead of making the cumulative time of the serif sound output different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing, for example, the number of times the dialogue sound is output (the number of appearances, 0 times). (Including) may be different, or when the dialogue sound is periodically output, the period (including 0 seconds) may be different.

Further, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of outputting an effect sound other than the dialogue sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of outputting a specific sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "Kyuin!") From the speakers 19a and 19b. That is, it is said that two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and the expectation that it develops into SP reach are high) by outputting specific sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b during the execution of the first reach effect. Information) is suggested, and one type of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high) is suggested by outputting a specific sound effect from the speakers 19a and 19b during the execution of the second reach effect. Is also good.
Further, when the specific effect using the effect means is an effect of outputting a specific sound effect from the speakers 19a and 19b, the speaker 19a is being executed between the first reach effect and the second reach effect. , The cumulative time for outputting the specific sound effect (cumulative time for outputting the specific sound effect) may be different from 19b, the number of times the specific sound effect is output (the number of appearances) may be different, or the specific sound effect may be cycled. In the case of output as a target, the period may be different.
Further, the effect means is not limited to the speakers 19a and 19b, and may be sound output means other than the speakers 19a and 19b.

Further, the first timing is not limited to the execution of the first reach effect. Further, the second timing is not limited to the execution of the second reach effect. For example, the first timing may be changed in the first half and the second timing may be changed in the second half.
Further, a specific effect using light emitting means (see FIG. 74 (a)), a specific effect using movable means (see FIG. 74 (b)), and a specific effect using display means (see FIG. 74 (c)). Specific effects using sound output means (see FIG. 74 (c)) can be appropriately combined and applied.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect using a display means (display device 41) and a sound output means (speakers 19a, 19b) in connection with the game. The specific effect is an effect of displaying a specific image (character image G6 of a ally character) on the display means and outputting a specific sound (speech sound of the ally character) from the sound output means, and the specific image is the first timing (the first timing (character image G6 of the ally character). The specific effect executed at (during the execution of the first reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during the execution of the second reach effect) different from the first timing are the same, and the specific sound is produced. The cumulative output time (cumulative time for output of dialogue sound), which is the cumulative output time, can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing (. See FIG. 74 (d)).
With this configuration, the cumulative output time (cumulative time for serif sound output) differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the display means (display device 41) and the sound output means (speakers 19a, 19b). It is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the means and the sound output means.

The specific image is not limited to the character image G6 of the ally character, and may be, for example, the character image G6 of the enemy character, the character image G6 of the ally character and the enemy character, or the dialogue image. It may be G5.
Further, the specific sound is not limited to the dialogue sound of the ally character, and may be, for example, the dialogue sound of the enemy character, the dialogue sound of the ally character and the enemy character, or a specific sound effect ( For example, it may be a sound effect such as "Kyuin!").

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims. Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications can be appropriately combined and applied.

10 Gaming machines 19a, 19b Speakers (directing means, sound output means)
25 Direction button (operation means)
38 1st special variable winning device (variable winning device)
39 Second special variable winning device (variable winning device)
41 Display device (directing means, display means)
44 board production device (movable production device)
46 Board decoration device (light emission effect device)
100 Game control device (preliminary judgment means, setting means)
300 Production control device (display control means)
440 Movable member (directing means, movable means)
G2 operation promotion image G5 dialogue image

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of performing an effect using a movable member in connection with a gaming machine.
Equipped with a display device
The movable member is
Predetermined operations including movement from the first position to the second position and movement from the second position to the first position can be performed, and light can be emitted.
The emission color of the movable member and the display color of the display device during the period when the movable member moves from the second position to the first position are colors of the same system.
Make a slight movement before performing the predetermined operation ,
The predetermined operation can be executed at the first timing in the running game and the second timing which is the timing in the game and is the timing after the first timing.
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of executing the predetermined operation differs between the first timing and the second timing in the game when an advantageous state favorable to the player occurs .

Images